JP2018110764A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing options of a player and improving the player's interest in games.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: a non-electric accessory 51 that presents an open state where game balls flowing down a game area are caused to enter and a close state where the game balls flowing down the game area caused not to enter, and shifts from the open state to the close state triggered by an entry of a game ball; and a distributor 53 that allows game balls flowing down the game area to temporarily enter. The distributor 53 includes: a first ball entry part that does not cause the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the close state to the open state triggered by an entry of a game ball; and a second ball entry part that causes the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the close state to the open state triggered by an entry of a game ball. The game machine starts a game in a specific control state upon an entry of a game ball into one of the non-electric accessory 51, the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board has been provided, and an internal lottery such as a big win lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operation port (starting ball entry means). A gaming machine to be executed is known (for example, see Patent Document 1). For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the gaming state shifts to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-074175

  However, since the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is interposed, the gaming machine enters the specific control state. There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

  The gaming machine of the present invention includes a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a stage for temporarily rolling and dropping the game ball flowing down the game area, and a stage A game machine comprising a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has fallen from the stage, wherein the stage has a rolling surface that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area, and a game ball that rolls the rolling surface By guiding the game, a guide path that discharges and drops the game ball to the game area, a game ball that is likely to be discharged from the guide path and enter the entrance means, and other games that flow down the game area Contact restriction means for restricting contact with the sphere is provided.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

The front view of the pachinko machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. Front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right-hand variable pitching mechanism Diagram showing the movement of game balls on the discharge route and the cruise route An enlarged view of the vicinity of Kroon from the top A view of the non-electrically-powered object seen from the back side of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of a non-electrical accessory Enlarged view of the vicinity of a non-electrical accessory A view of a non-electrical accessory from the side The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the success / failure table which remembers the value of the random number which is elected to the big hit occurrence The figure which shows the distribution table which memorize | stored the value of the random number concerning the jackpot type distribution destination The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interruption processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the entrance process for a round game execution gate The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of game times control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of data setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transfer process The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the number of rounds The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize mouth opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination processing of the number of rounds The figure which shows the relationship between game result and game state etc. The figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus at the time of shifting to opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of non-opening of a non-electric accessory, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable entrance mechanism The figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus at the time of shifting to opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of opening of a non-electric accessory, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable entrance mechanism Front view of game board according to a second embodiment of the present invention An exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the Kroon enlarged and viewed from diagonally above Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus at the time of shifting to opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of non-opening of a non-electric accessory, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable entrance mechanism A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a discharge passage after a ball enters the 4-round execution gate The perspective view which shows the flow in which a game ball is guided to a connection channel | path after the ball to the 4 round execution gate generate | occur | produces The figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus at the time of shifting to opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of non-opening of a non-electric accessory, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable entrance mechanism The perspective view which shows the flow in which a game ball is guided to a discharge passage after the entrance to a 16 round execution gate generate | occur | produces The perspective view which shows the flow in which a game ball is guided to a connecting passage after the entrance to a 16 round execution gate generate | occur | produces Front view of game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention An exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the Kroon enlarged and viewed from diagonally above The figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus at the time of shifting to opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of non-opening of a non-electric accessory, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable entrance mechanism Top view of the Kroon when entering the 4-round execution gate The figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus at the time of shifting to opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of non-opening of a non-electric accessory, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable entrance mechanism Top view of Kroon when entering the 16-round execution gate Front view of game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention An enlarged view of the vicinity of Kroon from the top Front view of game board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention The figure which shows the internal structure of a non-electrical accessory The figure which shows the internal structure of a non-electrically-powered accessory when the entrance to the 16-round execution gate occurs The figure which shows the internal structure of a non-electrical accessory when the entrance to a non-electrical accessory occurs The figure which shows the internal structure of a non-electrically-powered object after the entrance to a non-electrically-charged object occurs

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (front side). 12.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is disposed in front of the inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions being the support side, and both the left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that it can be rotated forward with one of the support sides as a support side, and the rear side with one of the left and right sides as the support side. And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

  Note that the gaming machine main body 12 includes a locking device (not shown) provided at the rotating tip. This locking device has a function of setting the gaming machine body 12 to a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a function of setting the front door frame 13 to a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 13 includes a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin or the like.
The front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of the light emitting means including various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion. 23, a speaker unit 24 that outputs sound effects according to the gaming situation, and an upper bulging unit 25 and a lower bulging unit 26 provided below the window unit 21. Yes.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and are both provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the pay-out device 71 (see FIG. 11) provided in the back pack unit, and arranges them in one row to the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 11) side. Has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 has a lower plate 26a provided on the inner side so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 25a.

  Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to launch a game ball from a game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. To do. The launch handle 27 changes the launch intensity of the game ball that is launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. This gaming area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide ball 34 for a game ball to the game area. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof is disposed on one side of the gaming area and faces the upper center of the gaming area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is increased from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35, an upper operating port (first starting pitching portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting pitching portion) 37, a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening, An out port 39 and a non-electrically-operated accessory 51 are provided. This non-electrical accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. In addition, the game board 31 has an opening 311 provided on the lower right side of the lower operation port 37 and an opening 312 provided on the lower side of the non-electrical accessory 51. In addition, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the central portion left side and the central portion right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 and various members (acts) such as a windmill in the game area so as to disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate. ing.

  Each of the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning ports of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 11) that detect the entering of game balls. The detection sensors 40 a to 40 d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 40a, the upper operation opening 36 includes a detection sensor 40b, the lower operation opening 37 includes a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning apparatus 38 includes a detection sensor 40d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect a winning game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor may be employed.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 award balls when a winning ball enters the variable winning device 38. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

  The out port 39 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings etc. are discharged from the game area through this out opening 39. In addition, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the ball enters the out port 39, unlike when the ball enters the various winning ports.

The non-electrical accessory 51 is provided on the lower left side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electrical accessory 51 includes a detection sensor 40 f (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40 f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 unlike the case where the ball enters the various winning openings. The non-electrically-powered object 51 will be described in detail later.
Note that the player strikes left with the rotation operation amount of the launching handle 27 being medium, and determines the arrival position of the game ball at the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting to the upper left, it is possible to guide the game ball to the upper working port 36, the non-electrically-powered object 51, etc. (left-handed route).

  Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40g (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40g is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the prize balls when the entrance to each through gate 41 occurs, unlike the case where the entrance to various winning entrances occurs.

  Here, the term “entering ball” means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 39, the game ball entering the various game ports is also expressed as a win. In addition, entering the through gate 41 means that the game area continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry to the through gate 41 is also expressed as a win, as is the case of entering the various winning openings.

  The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed in the game board 31. Each of the operation ports 36 and 37 opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operation port 36 is disposed upward and the lower operation port 37 is disposed downward. Are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The lower working port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 37a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric agent drive unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

  Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface portion of the upper working port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper working port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower working port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can win the lower working port 37 when the opened game is set. it can.

  In addition, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which a game ball can enter unlike the closed state) instead of the closed state and the open state described above, It is good also as a structure which switches the state in which a game ball is easy to win a prize to the action port 37. Further, the lower working port 37 may be configured not to perform such switching by setting of the electric accessory 37a but to be performed by displacement of the lower working port 37. 37 does not need to include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an open / close door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and the open / close door 38b. And a variable winning drive unit 38c.
Note that the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided with a transparent panel 381a that is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and is provided around the transparent panel 381a and is opaque. A panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

  The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The open / close door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The open / close door 38b moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and moving backward toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying in 31, there is an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38 a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the open / close door 38b to set the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state.

Specifically, the open / close door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can be won.
The open / close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the open / close door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the period from when the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again is referred to as one round game.
As described above, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, It functions as an open / close entrance means for paying out game balls.

The main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and includes a plurality of display devices such as a segment display and a dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. It is arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the main display device 42.

  The main display unit 45 includes a first result display unit 45 a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, and the internal performed based on the winning to the lower working port 37. And a second result display section 45b for displaying the lottery result (see FIG. 11). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening / closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes a variable display of a picture triggered by a winning at the upper working port 36, and an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36 as a stop result of the changing display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the display of the variation of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower working port 37, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 37 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as start-up entrance means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when entering the game ball.

  The accessory display unit 46 displays the variation of the picture triggered by the winning of each through gate 41, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric power open state. In this electric combination open state, the electric combination 37a provided in the lower working port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by segment displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed. Alternatively, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be employed.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G decreases due to the fall of the game ball. It has a configuration.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts symbol variation display based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variable display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

  The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp portions 49a provided in the upper area of the symbol display device 47, and four second holding lamp portions 49b provided in the right area of the first holding lamp portion 49a. , And four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in the upper region of the first holding lamp portion 49a.

The first hold lamp portion 49a is a part that displays the number of game balls held in the upper working port 36 and lights up according to the number of holds. The first hold lamp section 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display section 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second hold lamp portion 49b is a part that displays the number of game balls held in the lower operation port 37, and lights up according to the number of holds. The second hold lamp section 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third hold lamp portion 49c is a part that displays the number of game balls held in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of holds. The third holding lamp section 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 46.
Each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

Further, the center frame 48 includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in a lower right region of the symbol display device 47 and a cleon 53 provided in a left region of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Yes.
The right variable pitching mechanism 52 allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the right variable pitching mechanism 52 and then discharges it to the clown 53 and to the outside of the right variable pitching mechanism 52. By switching the discharge route to be performed, it has a function of guiding the game ball entered into the right side variable entry mechanism 52 to the cruise route or the discharge route.
Note that the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right variable entrance mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right side variable pitching mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right variable pitching mechanism 52 includes an introduction portion 521 that causes a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right variable pitching mechanism 52, and a right variable pitching mechanism at the introduction portion 521. 52, a guide passage 522 for guiding a game ball guided to the entrance of 52, a switching unit 523 for switching a destination of the game ball guided in the guide passage 522, a discharge port 524 provided at a guide destination of the guide passage 522, and And a guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

  The introduction portion 521 has a blade member 521a provided in the game board 31 so as to close an inlet formed on the right side of the right variable pitching mechanism 52, and a blade member centering on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 521b that rotatably supports 521a and a blade member drive unit 521c that drives the blade member 521a are provided.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 521b, thereby closing the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure), and rotating clockwise around the pin 521b. By moving, it has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is opened (see arrow in the figure). The blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the inlet side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the open state.
The blade member drive unit 521c drives the blade member 521a to set the blade member 521a to either the closed state or the open state.

Here, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state and an open state at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a predetermined cycle.
In the present embodiment, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set in a closed state of 1.5 sec and an open state of 0.5 sec. Therefore, the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds.
The introduction unit 521 only needs to be configured to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the right variable entry mechanism 52, and the timing of opening / closing the blade member 521a and the opening / closing The period can be set arbitrarily.

Accordingly, when the blade member 521a is set in the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a. (Solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set in the closed state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (the chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 522 is formed to have such a width that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. The guide passage 522 is bifurcated in the middle, and has an upstream guide passage 522a located on the upstream side of the branch and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c located on the downstream side. .
The guide passage 522 is formed transparent (or translucent) so that the inside thereof can be viewed from the front side.

  The upstream guide passage 522 a guides the game ball that has entered the entrance of the right variable entrance mechanism 52 by the introduction portion 521 from the entrance of the right variable entrance mechanism 52 to the branch position of the guide passage 522. The upstream guide passage 522a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 toward the branch position of the guide passage 522. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 through the upstream guide passage 522a using the inclination of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position close to the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522b is formed along a vertically downward direction so that the game ball falls from the branch position of the guide passage 522. The downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 through the upstream guide passage 522a to the discharge port 524.
The downstream guide passage 522c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream side guide passage 522c is formed from the branch position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525. The downstream guide passage 522c guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 through the upstream guide passage 522a to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

  Here, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40h is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40h detects a game ball entering the downstream guide passage 522c. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the ball enters the right variable pitching mechanism 52, unlike the case where the ball enters the various winning holes. Further, the detection sensor 40h may be any sensor as long as it can individually detect the winnings of the game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

  The switching unit 523 rotatably supports the plate 523a provided in the game board 31 so as to close the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c and the axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. The pin 523b and the plate drive part 523c which drives the plate 523a are provided.

The plate 523a rotates clockwise around the pin 523b, thereby closing the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure), and counterclockwise around the pin 523b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream side guide passage 522c.
The plate driving unit 523c drives the plate 523a to set the plate 523a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the plate 523a is set to the open state by the plate driving unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b and then to the discharge port 524. Guided (solid line in the figure). Thereafter, the game balls are discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 (discharge route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set in the closed state by the plate driving unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 travels downstream through the plate 523a using the inclination of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (two-dot chain line in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (clune route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set in an open state (discharge route) in which the game ball is not guided to the croon 53. Then, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the plate 523a is set in a closed state (clun route) in which the game ball is guided to the croon 53.
Further, the plate 523a is in an open state (discharge route) in which the game ball is not guided to the croon 53 when the detection sensor 40h detects the entry of the game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c. Is set again.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the cron 53 flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as an opportunity. It functions as a variable pitching means that makes it possible to enter the ball temporarily.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball on the discharge route and the cruise route. Specifically, FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball on the discharge route, and FIGS. 4C and 4D are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball on the cruise route. It is.
When the blade member 521a is set in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 as shown in FIG. 4A (see the arrow in the figure). This is the same whether the route is a discharge route or a cruise route.

On the other hand, when the wing member 521a is set to the open state, the game ball is transmitted through the wing member 521a using the inclination of the wing member 521a as shown in FIGS. To enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52.
When the discharge route is set by setting the plate 523a to the open state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the discharge port 524 as shown in FIG. (See arrow in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524.

The game balls discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 are changed in the dropping direction by the nail 44, so that the upper operation port 36, the lower operation port 37, and the out port 39 are changed. Will enter the ball.
In the present embodiment, the game balls discharged to the outside of the right variable pitching mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 have entered the upper operation port 36, the lower operation port 37, and the out port 39. However, for example, the ball may be designed to enter only the out port 39. In short, the flow path of the game ball after being discharged into the game area may be designed in any way.
In the present embodiment, the game ball is discharged to the game area via the discharge port 524. However, the game ball is not discharged to the game area, for example, the same route as the game ball that has entered the out port 39. May be collected through.

  Further, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG. (See arrow in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the cruise 53 through the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG.

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon as seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 5, the crune 53 is provided along a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls a game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 531. Side wall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and is formed with three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals, and formed at the center thereof, and each of the holes 533A to 533A to 533A. And a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. Middle arrow A).

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k is inserted into the hole 533C. A game ball is detected. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls 533A to 533C are entered, unlike the cases where the balls are entered into the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect a winning game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the round game is started. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and a predetermined number of round games are started.

Specifically, when the ball entering the hole 533A occurs, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games, and therefore starts executing 16 round games in the hole 533A. In order to suggest this, a mark is displayed around the hole 533A.
The pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times when the balls 533B and 533C are entered, and thus starts executing the round game four times in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not displayed to suggest you.

  The crune 53 is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (near side) of the game board 31 and, as indicated by an arrow B in the figure, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A and dropped downward. Is connected to the communication passage 535 that guides the non-electrical accessory 51 to the two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (back side) of the game board 31, and as shown by the arrow C in the drawing, A discharge passage 536 that discharges the game ball that has entered the balls 533B and 533C and dropped downward to the game area via the opening 311 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

FIG. 6 is a view of the non-electrically-powered object viewed from the back side of the game board. FIG. 9 is a view of the non-electrically-powered article as viewed from the side.
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 9, the non-electric accessory 51 is provided at a pair of upper blade members 511 provided above the game board 31 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and at a lower end portion of each upper blade member 511. A pair of rotating shafts 512 that are fixed and rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31; and a pair of plate-like bodies 513 having one end fixed to each rotating shaft 512; A pair of upper gears 514 fixed concentrically to each rotation shaft 512 is provided.

  In addition, the non-electrical accessory 51 is fixed to a pair of lower blade members 515 provided below the upper blade members 511 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and to the upper ends of the lower blade members 515. A pair of rotary shafts 516 provided so as to be rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the board 31 and a pair of gears which are provided so as to mesh with the upper gears 514 and are concentrically fixed to the rotary shafts 516. The lower gear 517 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 6A, each upper blade member 511 has a facing surface 511A that faces the horizontal direction and is arranged along the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 6A. . Each upper blade member 511 is provided in the game area (the front side of the game board 31) as shown in FIG.
Each upper blade member 511 is provided so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through a passage 511B formed between the opposing surfaces 511A at the same time. Further, the non-electrically-powered article 51 includes a baffle plate 51A provided above the entrance of the passage 511B. The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is narrower than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B in the closed state of the non-electrically-charged object 51.
The non-electrical accessory 51 includes a cover 518 provided in the game area so as to cover each upper blade member 511 and the passage 511B.

  Each plate-like body 513 is disposed so as to have an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511, as shown in FIG. Specifically, each plate-like body 513 is disposed to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end portion on the rotating shaft 512 side toward the lower end portion in the closed state of the non-electrically-powered object 51. . Here, each plate-like body 513 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the non-electrically-powered object 51 includes a passage 51B that guides a game ball that has entered the non-electric-powered object 51 to the back side of the game board 31 through the entrance of the passage 511B. One end is fixed to each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the discharge port of the passage 51B.

  Each lower blade | wing member 515 is arrange | positioned so that it may become an obtuse angle with respect to 511A of opposing surfaces of each upper blade | wing member 511, as shown to FIG. 6 (A). Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is arranged to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511 </ b> B as it goes from the upper end portion on the rotating shaft 516 side to the lower end portion in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51. . Each lower blade member 515 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 as shown in FIG. Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is provided at a passing position of the game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 535 of the croon 53. Here, one end of each lower blade member 515 is fixed to each rotation shaft 516 so as to close the discharge port 535 </ b> A of the communication passage 535.

As described above, the communication passage 535 of the above-described croon 53 communicates with the upper side of each lower blade member 515.
Therefore, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the croon 53 and dropped downward and guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 535 is, as shown in FIG. Drop toward 515. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, the game balls dropped toward the lower blade members 515 rotate the lower blade members 515 around the rotation shafts 516, thereby causing the lower blade members 515 to rotate. The lower end of the plate is pushed apart (see arrow A in the figure).
Note that after the lower wing members 515 are pushed apart so as to be separated from each other, the game balls are discharged from the non-electrically-powered object 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

  In addition, each rotation shaft 516 and each lower gear 517 rotate as each lower blade member 515 rotates, so that each upper gear 514 rotates as each lower gear 517 rotates. Then, each upper blade member 511 and each plate-like body 513 rotate as each upper gear 514 rotates (see arrow B in the figure). As a result, the non-electrically-powered article 51 shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Here, the non-electrical accessory 51 is provided with a non-electrical accessory opening detection sensor 519 (see FIG. 11) that detects the transition from the closed state to the open state. Note that the non-electric-powered object opening detection sensor 519 may be any sensor as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric-powered object 51. For example, a contact-type sensor or the like can be employed. .

The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is wider than that of one game ball as shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B when the non-electrically-charged object 51 is opened.
Here, each plate-like body 513 rotates around each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the passage 51 </ b> B in the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 51.

Therefore, the game balls that have entered the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B are guided to the back side of the game board 31 through the passage 51B, and then each plate-like body with the rotation shaft 512 as the center. By rotating 513, the lower end portion of each plate-like body 513 is pushed apart.
Note that after the lower ends of the respective plate-like bodies 513 are pushed apart so as to be separated from each other, the game balls are discharged from the non-electrically-powered object 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

  In addition, since each rotation shaft 512 and each upper gear 514 rotate as each plate-like body 513 rotates, each lower gear 517 rotates as each upper gear 514 rotates. Each lower blade member 515 rotates as each lower gear 517 rotates. As a result, the non-electrically-powered article 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

  The non-electrically-powered object 51 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, when the ball enters the non-electrically-operated object 51, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and a predetermined number of round games are started.

  Here, the ball entering the non-electrically-powered object 51 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 51C by the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the opened state of the non-electrically-powered object 51, a game ball that has entered the non-electrically-charged object 51 via the entrance of the passage 511B, and in the closed state of the non-electrically-charged object 51, via the communication passage 535. Both the game balls guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 are determined as balls entering the non-electrically-charged object 51.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts the execution of 16 round games when a ball enters the non-electric player 51, so the non-electric player 51 includes 16 rounds. The characters “16R”, which means starting the game, are displayed (see FIG. 2).
In the following description, the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A that start execution of 16 round games are referred to as a 16-round execution gate, and the holes 533B and 533C that start execution of 4 round games are 4 This is called a round execution gate, and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate are also collectively referred to as a round game execution gate.

Therefore, the non-electrically-powered object 51 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and triggered by the entry of the game ball It functions as a reversing ball entry means for shifting from the open state to the closed state.
The non-electrically-operated object 51 includes plate-like bodies 513 (first receiving portions) that receive game balls that have entered the non-electrically-related object 51 and lower blade members 515 that receive game balls that have entered the hole 533A. (Second receiving part), and by receiving a game ball in each plate-like body 513, it shifts from an open state to a closed state, and by receiving a game ball in each lower blade member 515, it is in a closed state. Transition from open to open state.

  In the present embodiment, the reversing entrance means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and closes by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part. Transitioned from a state to an open state. On the other hand, the reversing ball entry means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the reversing ball entry means in either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. The reverse intrusion means may be shifted from the open state to the closed state by the drive unit upon detection of the entry of the ball. In short, the reversing ball entry means has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and is opened when the game ball enters. What is necessary is just to transfer from a state to a closed state.

  In addition, the cruiser 53 causes the game balls that have entered the cruisee 53 to enter, and the holes 533B and 533C (firstly) that prevent the non-electrically-powered object 51 from shifting from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. ) And a hole 533A (the second hole for allowing the non-electrical accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the game ball. The entrance part). The cruising 53 has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the cruising 53, and the first and second entering portions are provided on the rolling surface 531, A game ball rolling on the moving surface 531 is entered.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second balls are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53 and enter the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531. . On the other hand, the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion, for example, distribute the game balls that have entered the variable entrance means to the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probability that the game balls are distributed to the first and second balls by the sorting mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable pitching means only needs to include a first pitching portion and a second pitching portion.

  Here, as described above, the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Each of the holes 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to players.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number of times (4 in the present embodiment) to open and close the variable prize-winning device 38 when a game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing the variable prize-winning device 38 is larger than the predetermined number (in this embodiment, when the game balls enter the non-electrically-charged object 51 and the hole 533A). 16 times), the game in the open / close execution mode is started in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed, thereby setting the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. For example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, the holes 533B and 533C are set. The player may be given higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. In short, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the reversing entrance means and the second entrance part is the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance part. What is necessary is just to give a player a higher value than a game.

  In the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. The correspondence relationship between 533A to 533C, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameability, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

7 and 8 are enlarged views of the vicinity of the non-electrically-powered article. Specifically, FIG. 7 (A) and FIG. 8 (A) are diagrams showing a state in which the game ball has dropped toward the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the open state of the non-electrically-charged object 51. 7 (B) and FIG. 8 (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the game ball thereafter.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the non-electrically acting object 51 includes a rotation distribution mechanism 51 </ b> D provided at the upper left of the baffle plate 51 </ b> A.
The rotation distribution mechanism 51D is formed at equal intervals around the rotation shaft 51D1 around the rotation shaft 51D1 and the rotation shaft 51D1 attached to the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. The three rotating blades 51D2 thus formed and a stopper 51D3 provided below the rotating shaft 51D1 are provided.

Of the three rotary blades 51D2, the upper rotary blade 51D2 is non-electrical as it goes upward as shown in FIG. 7A when the right rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. It inclines so that the accessory 51 may be approached.
In this state, the game ball that has dropped through the left side of the windmill located on the upper right side of the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is the upper rotation blade 51D2 and the left rotation blade 51D2 of the three rotation blades 51D2. (See the arrow in FIG. 7A).

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the game ball dropped between the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the left rotary blade 51D2 rotates the rotary shaft 51D1 counterclockwise via the rotary blade 51D2. Thereafter, the non-electrically-powered object 51 does not enter the ball and passes through the left side of the non-electrically-charged object 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 7B). Of the three rotary blades 51D2, the left rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. Thereby, the rotation shaft 51D1 stops its rotation. Note that the game ball that has passed the left side of the non-electrically-powered object 51 enters the out port 39 thereafter.

On the other hand, of the three rotating blades 51D2, the upper rotating blade 51D2 is upward as shown in FIG. 8A when the left rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As it goes, it tilts away from the non-electrically-powered object 51.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the windmill located at the upper right of the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is the upper rotation blade 51D2 and the right rotation blade 51D2 of the three rotation blades 51D2. (See the arrow in FIG. 8A).

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball dropped between the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the right rotating blade 51D2 rotates the rotating shaft 51D1 clockwise through the rotating blade 51D2. Then, the player enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 8B). Of the three rotary blades 51D2, the right rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. Thereby, the rotation shaft 51D1 stops its rotation.

In this way, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls that have fallen toward the non-electrically-powered object 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation, and the non-electrically-charged object 51 does not enter the game balls. In addition, it has a function of alternately switching between a right route for causing a non-electrically-powered object 51 to enter a game ball.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball that has fallen toward the non-electrically-powered object 51 against the player's intention to enter the non-electrically-charged object 51 and to easily reflect the player's intention. Can do.

In the present embodiment, the rotational distribution mechanism 51D is only the first stage, but the second stage rotational distribution mechanism 51D may be provided, and the third and subsequent rotational distribution mechanisms 51D are further provided. May be. According to this, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball that has been dropped toward the non-electrically-powered object 51 against the intention of the player to enter the non-electrically-charged object 51, and to further increase the player's intention. It can be easily reflected.
In the present embodiment, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls that have fallen toward the non-electrically-powered object 51 to the left and right according to their rotation. May be distributed.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 10, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Each display area has a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol in order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is arranged so that eight types of symbols consisting of numbers “1” to “8” are in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and “8” is followed by “1”. Configured. In FIG. 10, the center line of each display area is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. The effect for the game times is changed from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L. Exit with state.
In other words, the game times refers to the period from when the variable display is started on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to displaying a predetermined stop result based on winning at each of the operation ports 36 and 37.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scroll direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined instead of a mode having only a number, or a mode having only a picture.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 11, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power source for executing launch control for causing the game ball launching mechanism 81 to fire the game ball. And a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the backpack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when opened, or may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a substrate box is configured by combining a plurality of case bodies, and a connection portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or peeling is performed. At this time, a configuration in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off due to the adhesive layer remaining on the adhesion target can be applied so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure etc. which apply | coat an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between these case bodies can be employ | adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are formed as one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured as separate chips. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success / failure table storage area 63a, a sorting table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electric utility reservation area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

  The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40 a to 40 k, and a non-electrically-powered object opening detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37, a variable prize driving unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. The blade member drive unit 521c that opens and closes the plate 521a, the plate drive unit 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the state where the electric combination is released, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination driving unit 37b to open and close the electric combination 37a. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the special winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 performs driving control of the blade member driving unit 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate driving unit 523c to open / close the plate 523a. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each of the operation ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power source / launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40k are the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning apparatus 38, the out opening 39, the through gates 41, and the right variable entry mechanism 52. Or it is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40k, the MPU 62 wins various winning holes, out holes 39, the through gates 41, the right variable pitching mechanism 52, and the holes 533A to 533C of the crune 53. Judgment (entrance determination) is performed. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37.

  Based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60, the payout control device 70 executes payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player during a game). To do.

  The power / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, the power source / launch control device 80 generates necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation Supply power. The power supply / launch control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power interruption supplies power for storage retention to the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

  In addition, the power source / launch control device 80 executes launch control for causing the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeder that feeds the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a driving signal (firing permission signal) to the solenoid to fire a game ball when predetermined firing conditions are satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 12, the MPU 62 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 to execute internal lottery and the like. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery to determine whether to generate a reach display when the jackpot occurs. The reach random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS for determining the display duration time in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory release counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37 is in the electric utility open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 11).

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Is stored in a reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 11) provided as an acquisition information storage means. In addition, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the electric role reservation area 64c (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 displays the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, and the fourth area Ra4 when the winning to the upper working port 36 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Store in time series.

As described above, the first result display area holding area Ra includes four storage areas, and therefore, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation port 36 are reserved. The first result display area reservation area Ra includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
Note that the number of reserves related to the upper operation port 36 is not limited to four, but may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

  The second result display area reservation area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 displays the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the winning to the lower operating port 37 occurs continuously a plurality of times. Store in time series.

As described above, the second result display section holding area Rb includes four storage areas, and therefore, up to four winnings of game balls to the lower operation port 37 are held. Further, the second result display area reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
Note that the number of reserves related to the lower operation port 37 is not limited to four, but may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

  The execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when starting the variable display of the result display sections 45a and 45b. It is an area for moving.

Similarly to the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the electric utility reservation area 64c includes four storage areas. Therefore, a maximum of four game balls won in each through gate 41 are put on hold.
Note that the number of reserved gates for each through gate 41 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

<Detailed description of each counter>
Details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. The
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (whether or not the electric combination is set to the electric combination open state of the electric combination 37a of the lower working port 37 based on the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 64c. Execute a product open lottery).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with different frequencies at which the game balls can be awarded to the lower operation port 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

  In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state is the same (for example, both 4/5) in the power combination release lottery. However, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrification opening state is won, the number of times that the electric combination 37a is set to the open state is larger than the low frequency support mode, and the electric combination 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electrically-powered article 37a in the closed state during each opening in the one electric power opening state is shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is a minimum reserved time (a role that is secured as a waiting time from the completion of the electric utility product opening lottery to the next electric utility product opening lottery. The duration of one variation display in the object display unit 46 is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is likely to win the lower operation port 37 in comparison with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that the game ball will win the upper operation port 36 than the lower operation port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 is higher than the upper operation port 36.
When a winning to the lower operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric component release lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. In addition, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured to easily select a short reserved time as compared with the low frequency support mode. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times that the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the open time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode is used to set the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the low frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may be relatively high compared with.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. . The jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every loop. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot (win / no lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a success / failure table that stores random numbers to be won for jackpot occurrence.
Of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number value that is won for the jackpot occurrence is, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (Attack Information Group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / failing lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) that is difficult to win a jackpot occurrence, and a high probability mode (high probability state) that is likely to win a jackpot occurrence. . Further, the success / failure table includes a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) shown in FIG. 13A and a high probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 13 (b) (high probability success / failure information). Group).
The MPU 62 compares the success / failure table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b to execute a lottery for generating the jackpot.

These success / failure tables have a plurality of lottery lottery results (win / failure results) of “big hit win”, “special loss result”, and “normal loss result”.
Specifically, in the gaming state in which a winning table for low probability mode is referred to when a lottery occurs, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), there are two random number values for “hit winning”. It is.
On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, as shown in FIG. It is. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the winning table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the winning table for the high probability mode.

  In addition, the value and the number of random numbers stored in each success / failure table are arbitrary, and it is only necessary that the high probability mode has a higher probability of being a “big win” than the low probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the “big hit winning” stored in the high probability mode winning / failing table does not include the value of the random number that becomes the “big hit winning” stored in the low probability mode winning / failing table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the value of the random number that is “winning winning” stored in the success / failure table for the low probability mode.

Further, in each winning / failing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that becomes “big hit winning”, the winning result is made without winning the big hit.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results: “special loss results (small hit results)” and “normal loss results”. All of these losing results are common in that they do not trigger the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode. However, the “special failure result” is a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, whereas the “normal failure result” is not a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot type lottery (allocation lottery) when the jackpot occurs based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a distribution table that stores random values related to the jackpot type distribution destination.
As shown in FIG. 14, the random number value related to the jackpot type distribution destination is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. Minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes the lottery type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first allocation table is for the value of the big hit type counter C2 shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the big hit type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operating port 36. It is a table referred when performing a lottery type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 14A, the first distribution table includes “low accuracy results (special distribution results corresponding to low probability)”, “unspecified low round high accuracy results (latent high probability results corresponding to small rounds). ) ”,“ Explicitly small round high-accuracy result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0-29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0-9” is assigned to the “low-accuracy result”, and “10-14” is indicated as “not explicitly low”. “Round high-precision result” is assigned, “15-19” is assigned to “explicit small round high-precision result”, and “20-29” is assigned to “most advantageous result”.

The second allocation table corresponds to the value of the big hit type counter C2 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the big hit type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operating port 37 It is a table referred when performing a lottery type lottery.
In the second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 14B, two distribution results of “low accuracy result” and “most advantageous result” are used as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the big hit type counter C2, “0 to 9” is assigned to the “low probability result”, and “10 to 29” is assigned to the “most advantageous result”. ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / Loot lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (2) Support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode

First, the difference in the success / failure lottery mode (1) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode is continued until at least a “hit win” is made in the lottery.
“Unexpected small round high-accuracy result”, “Explicit low-round high-accuracy result”, and “Best advantage result” have high probability that the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” is a distribution result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued until at least a “big hit win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.
The “explicit small round high-accuracy result” and “most advantageous result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode is continued until at least a “big hit win” is made in the winning lottery.

  The difference in the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the “unusual winning result” is obtained instead of the “big hit winning” in the winning / losing lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the “unusual result” is obtained without winning the “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. And a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a reach display is executed. When a reach display is generated in the lottery, a reach display is generated. The reach table is a table storing random values related to the occurrence of reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63.

  Here, in the case where the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to the “most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the numbers is stopped and displayed on the active line L. In addition, in the case where the winning lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to the “low probability result”, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. Is stopped on the active line L. In addition, if the winning lottery results in a “big hit win” and the distribution lottery results in a “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, or in the positive or negative lottery “ If the result is a “special loss result”, the symbol display device 47 selects the stop result when the result is a “normal loss result” in the winning lottery, not the combination of symbols having the same number. A special symbol combination having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped on the active line L.

  The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed in the end ("Large winning" is selected in the winning lottery, and it is distributed to the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the distributing lottery) Occurs) regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is a case where a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("Big Winning Winning" in the winning lottery and "Inexplicitly Small Round High Probability Result" or "Explicit Small Round High in the Sorting Lottery) When it is distributed to “probable result”, or when it is “special loss result” without being “big win” in the winning / failing lottery, it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is such that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are on the effective line L. By stopping the display, the same symbol combination is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol row (for example, symbol row Z2) is variably displayed in that state.
Accordingly, the pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47, before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the win / win lottery becomes “big win”. It is possible to cause the player to expect that the “low-precision result” or “the most advantageous result” is assigned in the distribution lottery.

  Note that the reach display mode is not limited to this. A part of the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol sequence is variably displayed. Alternatively, a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after each symbol row is reduced or displayed.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. An expected effect is to make a player expect that a winning game will be a “big win” after displaying a change on the symbol display device 47 and before displaying a predetermined stop result. Directing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display described above and the notice display.

The notice display will not be a “Big Winner” in the winning lottery if it is “Large Winner” in the winning lottery, or if it is “Special Outcome” without being a “Big Winner” in the winning lottery This is an expected effect that makes it easier to generate an effect than when a “normally off result” is obtained. This notice display may make it easy to select an effect having a low appearance rate instead of making it easy to generate an effect, or may combine these effects.
The lottery for determining whether or not to generate a reach display is executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for determining whether or not to generate a notice display is executed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The notice display mode is that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 are variably displayed (for example, In a situation where a plurality of symbol strings (for example, symbol strings Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or reach display is generated after the symbol string Z1) is stopped on the active line L, a predetermined character is displayed. Are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display is generated in both cases where reach display is generated and reach display is not generated, but is set so that it is more likely to occur when reach display is generated than when reach display is not generated. Has been.
Note that the notice display is not limited to this, and may be displayed with the background changed, for example, or may be displayed with the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 changed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once every execution of a normal process described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Note that these display duration times will be described later in detail.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process, but the description of this process is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S101 to S106 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets and sets the winning ball command for instructing the payout of the winning ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 gives a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls as a specific unit number. Is sent to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  In step S <b> 101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process of the non-electric-powered object opening detection sensor 519. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the state of the non-electrically-powered object opening detection sensor 519, determines the state, and stores it in the RAM 64 as non-electrically-powered object opening information. When the MPU 62 determines that the non-electrically-powered object opening detection sensor 519 detects the opening of the non-electrically-powered object 51, the MPU 62 performs a predetermined process. This predetermined process will be described in detail later.

  In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

  In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 by adding 1 respectively, and updates it. The later value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of each of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In this through winning process, if the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40g corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 updated at step S103 Is stored in the electronic role holding area 64c. In addition, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the third hold lamp unit 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the voice light emission control device 90 lights the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third hold lamp portion 49c lights up in a number corresponding to the number of holds.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a ball entry process for a round game execution gate.
Hereinafter, the ball entry processing for the round game execution gate will be described in detail.

<Pick-up processing for round game execution gate>
FIG. 16 is a view showing a flowchart of the ball entering process for the round game execution gate.
In the ball entry process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S204 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 executes 16 rounds by determining whether or not the detection sensors 40f and 40i corresponding to the 16 round execution gate (the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A) detect the entry of the game ball. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the gate.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that a game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets a 16-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. The 16-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that no game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate, it corresponds to the 4-round execution gate (hole 533B and hole 533C) in step S203. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate by determining whether or not the detection sensors 40j and 40k have detected the entry of the game ball.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that a game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets a 4-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. The 4-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the round game execution gate.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that no game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, the MPU 62 does not execute the processes in and after step S204, and enters the round game execution gate. End the ball process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, the process after step S106 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S106, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operation port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the working opening will be described in detail.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning process for the operation port.
In the winning process for the operation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S307 as shown in FIG.

  In step S301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) at the upper operation port 36 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operation port 36 has detected a winning of the game ball. Determine whether. If the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has won the upper working port 36, in step S302, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display unit reservation area Ra, and holds the reservation. The number is set as a first start reserved memory number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display area reserved area Ra. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S305.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper operation port 36, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operation port 37 receives the game ball winning in step S303. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the lower operating port 37 by determining whether or not the above has been detected.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that the game ball has not won the lower operation port 37, the MPU 62 ends the operation port winning process. If the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that the game ball has won the lower operation port 37, in step S304, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb. The reserved number is set as a second start reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display area reserved area Rb. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S305.

After executing the process of step S302 or step S304, the MPU 62 determines that the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S302 or step S304 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) in step S305. It is determined whether or not there is.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the start-pending storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. If the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S306, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending storage number N and updates it.

  In step S307, the MPU 62 sets a combination of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the result display unit reserved area. The stored information is stored in the first storage area, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number N of the start storages updated in step S306.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending storage number RaN in step S302, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first result display section hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S306. For example, when “3” is set to the first start pending storage number RaN in step S302, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S306. The hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending storage number RbN in step S304, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process Are stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second result display section hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S306. To do. For example, when “3” is set to the second start pending storage number RbN in step S304, the MPU 62 is a memory area corresponding to “4” of the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S306. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S307, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operation port.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 lights the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first reserved lamp unit 49a or the second reserved lamp unit 49b The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which starts when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process that is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S414 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S401 to S409 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 when the remaining time is generated, and performs steps S412 and after according to the determination result of step S408. Run.

  In step S401, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set. If it is determined that a prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. In addition, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, and the effect command is If it is determined that it has been set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In step S402, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the variation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 and clears it.

In step S403, the MPU 62 executes a game times control process for advancing game times. In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery, determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine information related to
In step S404, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the gaming state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each gaming state such as the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described in detail later.

In step S405, the MPU 62 executes a demonstration display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined demo start start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without the start of a new game time after the game time has ended. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S405. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval of repeatedly executing the process of step S405 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the process of step S405 and reaches the start waiting period when it reaches 7500 times. Is determined to have passed. In addition, the structure which measures a start waiting period is arbitrary, For example, you may measure a start waiting period using a real-time clock. If the MPU 62 starts a new game number while counting the number of executions of the process in step S405, the MPU 62 resets the count value.

  In step S <b> 406, the MPU 62 executes a power combination support process for performing drive control of the electric combination 37 a provided in the lower operation port 37. In the electric utility support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64, and performs the electric accessory release lottery. In the case of winning, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory release lottery.

  In step S407, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / fire control device 80 to launch a game ball based on the fact that the player has rotated the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting a solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). . Note that the solenoid is excited so as to launch a game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to fire the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

  In step S408, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed. This power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main process.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by assigning 1 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power failure flag by assigning 0 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S408, the MPU 62 performs the power interruption processing after step S412 without executing the processing after step S409. Specifically, in step S412, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S413, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (a checksum of the RAM 64). In step S414, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power failure flag has not been set, in step S409, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, the current normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the next normal processing timing has not been reached, that is, if the remaining time has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S410, and step S411. Then, the variation type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 until it is determined in step S409 that the next normal processing timing has been reached.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 performs the next time by executing step S401 again. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S512 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 executes a startup process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to be operable, and then waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after turning on the power. ) Will wait.

  In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec which is a permission prohibition period has elapsed. If the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not elapsed in step S502, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S502. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S503.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S502. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number of executions of the process of step S502 is counted and reaches 10,000. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S503, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S <b> 504, the MPU 62 determines whether a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power / fire control device 80 is on.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch has been turned on, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S509 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, in step S505, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power failure flag has not been set, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S509 and subsequent steps.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S505, the MPU 62 calculates a RAM determination value in step S506.
In step S507, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 with the RAM determination value stored in step S413 (power interruption processing) of the normal process. The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S509 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S507, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S508.

  The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method for confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is assigned to a predetermined area of the RAM 64 during power interruption processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining whether or not this keyword is normally written by the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S504, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S505, or determines the RAM determination value in step S507. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing from step S509 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S509, and executes initialization of the RAM 64 in step S510.

  Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing down the RAM erase switch when the game hall starts business. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S508 or step S510, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S511, and in step S512, the timer interrupt is issued. The generation of the process is permitted, and the process proceeds to the normal process described above.
The control board on the sub side receives the initial command transmitted in step S511, thereby recognizing that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed and executing its own initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game times control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S609 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, it ends the game number control process without executing the processes in and after step S602. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 refers to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 62 sets an opening / closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and clears the opening / closing execution mode flag when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, in step S602, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display, that is, a game is in progress. It is determined whether or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not in a variable display, the MPU 62 executes a game turn start process in steps S603 to S605.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game turn progression process in steps S606 to S609.

First, the process for starting game times in steps S603 to S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb, and holds these numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of N is equal to or less than “0”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than “0”, in step S604, the MPU 62 reserves the first result display area Ra or the second result display area reservation area. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for use in game times is executed. Thereafter, in step S605, the MPU 62 starts a variation display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47, executes a variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S711 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display portion reservation area Rb set in step S304 of the winning operation for the operation port is “0” or less. To do. If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start pending storage number RbN is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S706, and proceeds to step S701. When it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than “0”, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711 is executed.

Thus, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit for use in the game times, and a second result display unit. And a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for use in game times.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 performs the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute data setting process. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the holding information stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, Regardless of whether or not there is holding information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball, the holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is preferentially played. Set for 1 digestion.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S706 will be described.
In step S702, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display section hold area Ra.
In step S703, the MPU 62 moves the holding information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display unit holding area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S704, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion hold area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and sets the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3. Shift to area Ra3.

  In step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display part flag is a flag for specifying which main display part 45 of the first result display part 45a and the second result display part 45b starts the variable display when the game times are digested. It is. In this step S705, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display section flag, the variable display is displayed on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Indicates that you want to start.

In step S706, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. The command at the time of shift is a voice light emission control device indicating that the hold information has been shifted with respect to the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 36. The information for making 90 recognize is included.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighting of the first holding lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved gaming balls won in the upper operation port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711 will be described.
In step S707, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold memory number RbN in the second result display portion hold area Rb.
In step S708, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display section hold area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S709, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion hold area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and sets the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

  In step S710, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S710, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display portion flag, when the game time is digested, the MPU 62 displays the variation on the second result display portion 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. Indicates that you want to start.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information has been shifted with respect to the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37. The information for making 90 recognize is included.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved gaming balls won in the lower operation port 37 decreases.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start process.
In the change start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S818 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / raising lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the MPU 62 obtains the low probability mode success table (see FIG. 13A) from the ROM 63's success table storage area 63a. If it is determined in step S801 that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S803, the success / failure table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 13B) is stored from the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

  After executing the process of step S802 or step S803, the MPU 62 executes a determination process in step S804. In this success / failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success / failure table read in step S802 or S803, thereby determining the result of the success / failure lottery (result of success / failure). Determine. As described above, the success / failure result is one of “big win”, “special failure result”, and “normal failure result”, and even if the success / failure lottery mode is a low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. But the same is true.

  In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S804 is “big hit winning”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the winning / failing result is “big hit winning”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S806, and if it is determined in step S805 that the winning / failing result is not “big win winning”. Then, the processing after step S812 is executed.

First, in step S805, a process (process after step S806) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning / failing result is “big win” will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. In step S807, the first allocation table (see FIG. 14A) is read from the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. In step S808, the second distribution table (see FIG. 14B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  After executing the process of step S807 or step S808, the MPU 62 executes a distribution determination process in step S809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S807 or step S808, thereby determining the result of distribution lottery ( Distribution result).

  In step S810, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S809 information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. The determination is made according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S809 with the jackpot result stop result table stored in advance in the ROM 63, so that the main display unit 45 finally displays a stop display. Determine such information. The jackpot result stop result table defines the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each sorting result.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets a flag corresponding to the distribution result determined in step S809 in the RAM 64. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the low-accuracy result flag when specifying that the distribution result is “low-accuracy result”, and identifies that it is “inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result”. In this case, the non-explicit small round high-accuracy result flag is set. If it is specified that the result is "explicit small round high-accuracy result", the explicit low-round high-accuracy result flag is set, If it is specified that the maximum advantageous result flag is set. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S816.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, a process (step S812 and subsequent processes) performed when it is determined in step S805 that the success / failure result is not “big win” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the determination result determined in step S804 is a “special loss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 executes processing subsequent to step S813, and in step S812 determines that the result is not “special outage result”. In step S815, the processing after step S815 is executed.

In step S813, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a special loss result. In the stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special loss result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S814, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to the special out flag to determine whether or not the result is a “special out result”.

  On the other hand, in step S815, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal off result. In the stop result setting process for the normal off result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines information related to the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. The pattern mode set in the stop result table for the normal loss result is different from the pattern mode set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special loss result.

After executing any one of steps S811, S814, and S815, the MPU 62 executes a display duration (display duration) setting process in step S816.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

  Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 47. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result determined in step S809 is a “low-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, and the success / failure result determined in step S804 is a “normal out-of-result”. At the same time, when the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Reach generation lottery is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, thereby obtaining the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, thereby changing the counter for the variation type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when digesting the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 36 increases. And the display continuation time at the time of digesting the hold information concerning the lower operation port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of the hold operations related to the lower operation port 37 increases. The reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display non-occurrence display duration table may be set in a reverse relationship to the relationship described above, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It is good also as a structure which does not change. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the success / failure results and the distribution results.

In step S817, the MPU 62 sets a change command and a type command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change command and the type command set in step S817 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The change command includes information related to the display duration time. The change command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually Is different.
Therefore, even if information indicating whether or not reach display occurs is not included in the change command, reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device based on the information related to the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the change command indirectly includes information on whether or not reach display occurs. Note that the change command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command includes information related to the result of the determination. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the success / failure result, information related to “big win”, “special loss result”, and “normal loss result”. The type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the distribution result, each of the “low-precision result”, “non-explicit small round high-precision result”, “explicit small round high-precision result”, and “best advantage result”. Contains information.
In the following description, the result of the success / failure and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S818, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the change start process.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display portion flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first game ball is awarded based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45a indicates that the variable display is started, the first result display unit 45a starts the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines the second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45b indicates that the variable display is started, the second result display unit 45b starts the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game times control processing, the game times progress processing in steps S606 to S609 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. If the MPU 62 determines that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display, the MPU 62 performs the game turn progression in steps S606 to S609. Execute the process.

  In step S606, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S816 of the change start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become “0” or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes a variable display process in step S607. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the display continuation time has elapsed in step S606, the MPU 62 executes a variation end process in step S608. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of any one of step S810, step S813, and step S815 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display (main The information related to the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45 is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 so that a picture corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during variable display.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, a game hall manager or the like can check the game result by viewing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not an illegal act is attempted to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as in the case of winning a lottery with a big hit. Can be done automatically.
Further, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 are stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. The degree of attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S609, the MPU 62 sets a change end command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change end command set in step S609 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game time based on the change end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to end the game times effect independently without requiring the reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S911.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening / closing execution mode will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the change display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been completed, in step S903, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Determine whether. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure result is “big win” or “special loss result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the determination result corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flag in the opening / closing execution mode in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result of the success / failure does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (when the result of the success / failure is determined to be a “normal failure result”), the game The state transition process ends.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is a “special outage result”.
If it is determined in step S904 that the result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 sets “2” to the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S905. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the result is not “special loss result”, that is, if the result is determined to be “big win”, the distribution result in step S906. Is a small round high-accuracy result (“inexplicit small round high-precision result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”).

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is a small round high-accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Further, if the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a low-round high-accuracy result, that is, if it is determined that the distribution result is a “low-accuracy result” or a “most advantageous result”, the step In S908, a round number setting process is executed. In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets “4” or “16” to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the round number setting process.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag (4 round execution flag and 16 round execution flag) stored in the RAM 64.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is being opened by determining whether or not the non-electric-powered object opening detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electrically-charged object 51. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is not being opened, the MPU 62 sets a non-opening command in step S1003. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the non-opening command set in step S1003 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the non-opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is being opened, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1004. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the open time command set in step S1004 to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

  After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1004, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process in step S1005. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c.

  In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a round game execution flag (4 round execution flag or 16 round execution flag) is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate) after executing the setting process of the cruise route.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes step S1006 again.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 whether or not the 4-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64. .

If the MPU 62 determines that the 4-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1007, the MPU 62 sets “4” in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1008.
In step S1009, the MPU 92 sets a 4-round execution command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the 4-round execution command set in step S1009 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the 16-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 determines in step S1010. Then, “16” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1011, the MPU 92 sets a 16 round execution command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the 16 round execution command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the 16 round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

  After executing the process of step S1009 or step S1011, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the round number setting process.

In this way, after the MPU 62 sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the croon route, the MPU 62 enters the right variable pitch when the game ball enters the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate). Since the ball mechanism 52 is set as the discharge route, depending on the timing when the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 is set as the discharge route, the crew 53 may enter a plurality of game balls. In this case, the MPU 62 sets the number of round games based on the round game execution gate in which one of the plurality of game balls enters first, so that the player's game The degree of attention can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, although the crune 53 is comprised so that a several game ball may be entered, you may be comprised so that a plurality of game balls may not be entered.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening / closing execution modes having different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode that shifts when the success / failure result is “big win”, and the opening / closing number that shifts when the success / failure result is “special loss result”. And a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The open / close number regulation mode is terminated on condition that a predetermined total number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 38a has been executed or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the open / close counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on condition of the number of round games executed.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the one big winning opening 38a for one round game. One round game is continued until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S909 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing any one of the processes of step S905, step S907, and step S908, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time (waiting period) for opening the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S909. Set “1000”. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result of the success / failure corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
In addition, the waiting time for opening is not limited to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which is slightly different according to the kind of game result to such an extent that it is recognized that it is similar to a player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between a game result of “low probability result” or “most advantageous result” and a game result other than these, etc. It is good also as a structure made to differ greatly according to the kind of.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the opening command includes information related to the number of round games when the game result is a “low probability result” or a “most advantageous result”. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is being performed in step S901 (process after step S911) will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening / closing process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening / closing process.
In the special winning opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1124 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1106 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened in step S1101 (processing after step S1102) will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less and the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than “0”, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T in step S1103. It is determined whether or not the value is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes a big prize opening opening process in step S1104.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process in step S1104 will be described in detail.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the big prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1207 as shown in FIG.
In step S <b> 1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the determination result is a “special loss result”.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the result is “special loss result”, in step S1202, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. In S1203, “85” is set to the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the result is not “special loss result”, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC in step S1204, and in step S1205, the distribution result. Is a small round high-accuracy result (“inexplicit small round high-precision result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is a small round high-accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “85” to the timer counter T in step S1203 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not a small round high-accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “15000” to the timer counter T in step S1206. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

  After executing the process of step S1203 or step S1206, the MPU 62 executes an opening execution process of the special winning opening 38a in step S1207. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in an open state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1202 or step S1204 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a.
The value set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 defines the upper limit duration until the door 38b is set to the closed state after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting “85” or “15000” to the timer counter T. Specifically, the MPU 62 includes a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper-limit duration is set to 30 sec and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper-limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. Aspect) is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a period of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC, thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight.
Accordingly, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be awarded to the big winning opening 38a and the launch period of the game balls, so the upper limit of eight game balls It is easy to make a prize in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration in the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a and the launch period of the game balls (more specifically, the launch of the game balls). Therefore, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big prize opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball in the big prize opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process, the processes after step S1105 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1105 after executing the special winning opening release process in step S1104. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1105 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, processing (processing after step S1106) when it is determined in step S1101 that the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is being opened will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1203 or step S1206 of the big prize opening opening process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1107 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1118 and subsequent steps.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0” in step S1106 (process after step S1107) will be described.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a winning to the big winning opening 38a has occurred. The determination as to whether or not a winning at the special winning opening 38a has occurred is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that no prize winning to the big prize opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that a winning to the big winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the value of the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 in step S1108.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening / closing process.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S1110. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in the closed state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the close command set in step S1111 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S <b> 1112, the MPU 62 determines whether the determination result is a “special loss result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the result is “special loss result”, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S1123 onward.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the result is not “special loss result”, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S1113 onward.
In step S1113, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S1114, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 sets “500” as the value of the timer counter T in step S1115. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1115 is the waiting for opening until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the opened state again after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the opened state. Time is prescribed. In the present embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This open standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S1116.
In step S1116, the MPU 62 sets “2000” as the ending standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for opening. That is, the ending standby time is the same regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode.
Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this. For example, the waiting time for ending may be slightly different depending on the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for ending is greatly different between a game result of “low probability result” or “most advantageous result” and a game result other than these, etc. It is good also as a structure made to differ greatly according to the kind of.

In step S1117, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. This ending command includes information on whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is open. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is open by determining whether or not the non-electrically-charged object opening detection sensor 519 detects the opening of the non-electrically-charged object 51. This information is included in the ending command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1117 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less in step S1106 (process after step S1118) will be described.
In step S1118, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process as in step S1110 described above.
In step S1119, the MPU 62 sets a close command as in step S1111 described above.

In step S1120, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is a “special loss result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the result is not “special loss result”, that is, if it is determined that the result is “big win”, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S1121.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1123 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S1121) when it is determined in step S1120 that the success / failure result is not the “special failure result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1121, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S1122, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing from S1116 onward.

Next, processing (processing after step S1123) when it is determined in step S1112 or step S1120 that the success / failure result is “special loss result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1123, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC and updates it.

In step S1124, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing from S1116.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S912 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S911, the MPU 62 determines in step S912 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less and the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. judge.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S913. It is determined whether or not “0” or less.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less in step S913, after clearing the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S914, The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1312 as shown in FIG.
In step S <b> 1301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high-accuracy result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1302.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1305 onward.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high-accuracy result” in step S1301 (the processing after step S1302) will be described.
In step S1302, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1303, the MPU 62 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued until at least “Big Winning” is selected in the lottery.

  In step S1304, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Note that when the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the MPU 62 sets the flags (the low-accuracy result flag, the unspecified low-round high-accuracy result flag, the explicit low-round high) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. Clear certain result flag and most advantageous result flag) and special outlier flag. In step S801 of the above-described change start process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. Yes.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” in step S1301 (process after step S1305) will be described.
In step S1305, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1306 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is not the “inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1308 onward.

First, processing (processing after step S1306) when it is determined in step S1305 that the distribution result is the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1306, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1303 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1307. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Next, processing (processing after step S1308) when it is determined in step S1305 that the distribution result is not the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the distribution result is not the “low probability result” (if the result is determined to be “special outage result”), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. To do.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1309 onward.

  In step S1309, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least a “big hit win” in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes other than the “low-probability result”.

In step S1310, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1311, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1312, the MPU 62 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 64. If the number limit flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games that are the end reference number set in the game number counter are set. Continue until digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times restriction flag when 100 game times have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as a power combination support process in step S406 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, if the winning / losing lottery results in a “big hit winning” and the sorting result in the sorting lottery is “most advantageous result” or “explicitly small round highly accurate result”, the gaming state is the current Regardless of the gaming state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big win” is selected in the winning lottery.

  In addition, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the winning lottery is "big win" and the distribution result is "unspecified small round high-accuracy result" The gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big win” is selected in the winning lottery.

  On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery results in a “big win”, and the sorting result in the sorting lottery becomes an “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result” The game state shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big hit win” is made in the winning lottery.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the sorting result is “low probability result” in the sorting lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current gaming state) After completion of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode will continue until at least “Big Winning” is selected in the winning lottery, and the high frequency support mode will be low if 100 game games are consumed without becoming “Big Winning” in the winning lottery. Enter frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery does not result in a “big hit winning”, that is, when the winning / failing result becomes a “special outage result” or “normal outage result”, the gaming state does not shift.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process is performed when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode and then opened and closed when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and each of the holes 533A to 533C. It functions as a specific control start unit that starts a game in the execution mode.

<Electrical Configuration of Sound Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element obtained by compounding a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49 a to 49 c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 performs drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command obtained by analyzing these commands to the display control apparatus 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element obtained by compounding a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, the VDP 105, the character ROM 106, and the video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

  The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs a predetermined calculation process based on this command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply when holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed. The work RAM 104 is volatile that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the entity should be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various designs, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process that advances the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1401 to S1405 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

  In step S1401, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer according to the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S1403, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S1402. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24.

  In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new gaming time after the gaming time has ended. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23 and performs sound control of the speaker unit 24.

  In step S1405, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process in step S1402 to the display control apparatus 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control apparatus 100, and displays the various commands. If it is determined that the timing for transmitting to has been reached, the command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518 as shown in FIG.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that it has not received each command, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S1509 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S1501, the game result is determined as “most advantageous result” or “low probability” based on the content of the type command in step S1502. It is determined whether or not the result is “result”.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result”, in step S1503, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is “the most advantageous result”, the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped on the active line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a “low probability result”, the same even number is used as the stop result to be finally stopped on the active line L. Information related to the combination of symbols is determined. Note that odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”, in step S1504, based on the content of the type command, the game result is “ It is determined whether the result is a “normally off result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is not the “normally missed result”, that is, the game result is “special missed result”, “non-explicitly small round highly accurate result”, and “explicitly small round highly accurate result”. In any case, in step S1505, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normally missed result” in the lottery determination (for example, “3 ・ 4 ・ 1”) is determined. This special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is the “normally lost result”, in step S1506, the MPU 92 executes a normally determined symbol determination process. In the normal determination symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the contents of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines information related to the combination of symbols for reach display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. The combination of symbols for reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the symbols described above as a stop result that is finally stopped on the active line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a special symbol combination, and a reach display symbol combination by lottery or the like.

  After executing any one of steps S1503, S1505, and S1506, the MPU 92 executes an effect pattern determination process in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In step S1507, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution process in step S1403 based on the selected effect pattern.

  In step S1508, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1503, S1505, and S1506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the change start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These change start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  Based on the fluctuation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 generates a data table for executing the display of the fluctuation display and the stop result on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103. read out. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1508 or when determining that the change command and the type command have not been received in step S1501, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1509.
In step S1509, the MPU 92 executes a round number determination process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the round number determination process.
In the round number determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1612 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that a non-opening command has been received, the MPU 92 executes non-opening effect determination processing in step S1602. In this non-opening effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to select the content of the effect corresponding to the non-opening command.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1603, the MPU 92 sets a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determining process in step S1602. Then, the MPU 92 stores the non-opening effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This non-opening effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for executing the non-opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the non-opening effect.

Whether the MPU 92 has received the open command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1604 after executing the process of step S1603 or if it is determined in step S1601 that the non-open command has not been received. Determine whether or not.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 executes an opening effect determination process in step S1605. In the opening effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to select the content of the effect corresponding to the opening command.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1606, the MPU 92 sets an opening effect command related to the opening effect determined in the opening effect determination process in step S1605. Then, the MPU 92 stores the effect command for opening effect in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This opening effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for executing the opening effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the opening effect.

Whether the MPU 92 has received the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1607 after executing the process of step S1606 or if it is determined in step S1604 that the open command has not been received. Determine whether or not.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4-round execution command has been received, the MPU 92 executes a 4-round execution effect determination process in step S1608. In the determination process of the 4-round execution effect, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to select the content of the effect corresponding to the 4-round execution command.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1609, the MPU 92 sets a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process in step S1608. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 4-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This 4-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the 4-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the 4-round execution effect.

The MPU 92 receives the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1610 after executing the process of step S1609 or if it is determined in step S1607 that the 4-round execution command has not been received. It is determined whether or not.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that a 16-round execution command has been received, the MPU 92 executes a 16-round execution effect determination process in step S1611. In this 16-round execution effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to select the content of the effect corresponding to the 16-round execution command.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S <b> 1612, the MPU 92 sets a 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process in step S <b> 1611. Then, the MPU 92 stores a 16 round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This 16-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  Based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for executing the 16-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes a 16-round execution effect.

  The MPU 92 ends the round number determination process after executing the process of step S1612 or when determining that the 16-round execution command is not received in step S1610.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1510, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1514.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result in step S1511 based on the contents of the opening command.

  In step S1512, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1511. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1511 that the game result is “special outage result” or “implicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 92 is used for the opening / closing execution mode. Production A is selected as production. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is “the most advantageous result” and determines that the number of round games is four times, the MPU 92 selects the effect C1 or the effect D1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. To do. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is “the most advantageous result” and determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 or the effect D2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. To do. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a “low probability result” and determines that the number of round games is four, the MPU 92 selects the effect D1 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a “low probability result” and determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect D2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

The duration time of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the production C1 and the production D1 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed four times in a long-time manner in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration time of the effects C2 and the effects D2 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 16 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effects C1 and C2 are also simply referred to as effects C, and the effects D1 and D2 are also simply referred to as effects D.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

  In step S1513, the MPU 92 sets an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1512. Then, the MPU 92 stores the opening / closing execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1513 or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received in step S1510, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1514.
In step S1514, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that an ending command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1518.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, in step S1515, the MPU 92 performs a non-electrically-powered object release determination process. In the non-electrical accessory release determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-electrical accessory 51 is open based on the content of the ending command.

  In step S1516, the MPU 92 executes an ending effect determination process corresponding to the state of the non-electrically-powered object 51 determined in step S1515. In the ending effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open (when it is determined that it is closed), the MPU 92 opens the non-electrical accessory 51 as an ending effect. Select a normal performance that does not notify the player. On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is being opened, the MPU 92 selects an opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 as an ending effect. To do.

  In step S1517, the MPU 92 sets an ending effect command related to the ending effect (normal effect or opening notification effect) determined in the ending effect determination process in step S1516. Then, the MPU 92 stores the ending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This ending effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  Based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes an ending effect.

  The MPU 92 executes other processing in step S1518 after executing the processing in step S1517 or when determining that the ending command has not been received in step S1514. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command and the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding “normally missed results” and the game states and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction, and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 32, the pachinko machine 10 has a game result excluding the “ordinary loss result”, a “bonus winning” result and a “special loss result” success / failure result, “an unspecified low round high-accuracy result”, “ It has a distribution result of “small round high accuracy result”, “most favorable result”, and “low accuracy result”.

Here, as shown in the second column of FIG. 32, the “special loss result” is a game result that is selected when a “big win” is not achieved in the winning lottery (the symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result that is selected when a “big hit win” is selected (symbol “○” in the figure) in the winning / losing lottery.
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally lost result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the gaming result and the gaming state as follows, but the combination of the gaming result and the gaming state, the contents of the gaming result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the “special loss result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening / closing of the special prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, in the “special loss result”, the success / failure lottery mode is not shifted.
In the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the big prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. Is done. In addition, in the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
As described above, the “special loss result” and the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” are different in that the opening / closing execution mode is different, but the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. doing.

  Further, in the “special loss result” and the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the stop result is a special symbol combination, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the “special out-of-range results” and “inexplicit small round high-accuracy results”. Further, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, it is not possible for the player to grasp whether the game result is the “special out-of-game result” or the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” by confirming the stop result or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if it is a case where a “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” is entered in the distribution lottery and the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 does not accept the lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends The mode is disguised as if it has not transitioned.
For this reason, the player can play a game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the maximum number of times being twice, and the opening / closing of the special prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time manner. The Further, in the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the stop result is a special symbol combination, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B. In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Further, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result” and the “low probability result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit number of times being four or sixteen, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is performed for a long time. It is performed 4 or 16 times in a manner.
Here, in the “most advantageous result”, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode and is used for the opening / closing execution mode. The production is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same even number of stop results In this case, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect D.
In addition, in the “low accuracy result”, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the “most advantageous result” and the “low probability result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

  Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the production C, the game result is “the most advantageous result”. Can be grasped. However, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the game result is “the most advantageous result”. It is impossible to grasp whether the result is “low accuracy result”.

  Then, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is the high probability mode on the display screen G, and the high frequency support mode allows the game times to be the end reference number (specifically, 100 When the number of times is reached, an image for informing the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. If so, camouflaging is performed as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

  If the distribution result is the “most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after having played 100 game times without becoming a “big win” in the winning lottery. An image clearly indicating this is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage applied as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

<Flow for switching to open / close execution mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electrically-powered accessory, and the right variable pitching mechanism when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-charged object is not opened. FIG. 33 shows a simplified non-electrically-powered object 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a display screen G when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. FIGS. 33B and 33C are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. FIGS. 33D and 33E are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 33 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the MPU 102 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is not opened, the display screen of the symbol display device 47 displays each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the lower left position of G, and the fluctuation | variation display of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the MPU 92 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received a non-opening command. An effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determining process in step S1602 is set. The MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel line “Aim at the croon by right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the player can make a right-hand hit. Suggest.

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball is inclined by the blade member 521a. Is used to enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is guided by the guide rail 525. Be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the cruise 53 through the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When the entrance to the holes 533B and 533C (4-round execution gate) has occurred, the MPU 92 determines that the 4-round execution command has been received in step S1607. Therefore, in step S1608, the 4-round execution effect. In step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process in step S1608 is set. The MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33B, the MPU 102 displays an angel line “4R confirmed! Right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of four round games is started.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the entrance to the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate) occurs, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric component 51 is not open, so the non-electric component 51 is used as an ending effect. Select the normal performance that does not notify the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that a 16 round execution command is received in step S1610. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 round execution effect based on the 16 round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33D, the MPU 102 displays an angel line “16R confirmed! Right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will be started. In addition, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the cruiser 53 and dropped downward and guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 535 moves the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the entrance to the hole 533A (16 round execution gate) occurs, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is open in step S1515. Select an opening notification effect to notify the player of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode. Thereafter, the MPU 102 displays an angel line “next jackpot is left-handed and 16R is confirmed!” Displayed at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 33 (F). Then, the player is notified of the release of the non-electrically-powered object 51.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electrically-powered accessory, and the right variable pitching mechanism when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-charged object is opened. In FIG. 34, the non-electrically-powered object 51 is simplified and shown at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 34 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 34 (B) and 34 (C) are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51. FIG.

When the MPU 102 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 102 displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 by reducing each symbol row Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. Is placed at the lower left position, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the MPU 92 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command has been received, so in step S1605 the determination of the opening effect is performed. The process is executed, and in step S1606, an opening effect command related to the opening effect determined in the opening effect determination process in step S1605 is set. The MPU 102 executes the opening effect based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests that the player left-hands by displaying the angel line “16R confirmed by left-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. .

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball is inclined by the blade member 521a. Is used to enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is guided by the guide rail 525. Be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the cruise 53 through the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.
In addition, when the entrance into each hole 533A-533C generate | occur | produces, the pachinko machine 10 performs the process similar to the case where it transfers to the opening-and-closing execution mode at the time of non-opening of a non-electric-powered accessory.

  When the entry to the non-electrical accessory 51 (16-round execution gate) occurs, the MPU 92 determines that a 16-round execution command has been received in step S1610. Therefore, in step S1611, 16 rounds are executed. An effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 round execution effect based on the 16 round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34B, the MPU 102 displays an angel line “16R confirmed! Right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will be started. In addition, the game ball that has entered the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B shifts the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the open state to the closed state.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the entry to the non-electrical accessory 51 (16 round execution gate) occurs, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, so the non-electrical accessory is used as an ending effect. A normal performance that does not notify the player of the release of 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 34, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is easy to generate a game ball entering the upper working port 36 and is difficult to generate a game ball entering the lower working port 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided, which makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the operating port 37 and hardly generates a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electrically-powered object 51 is disposed on the left-hand route.

In addition, the main control device 60 has a low-frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operation port 37 is lower than the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 than the upper operation port 36. And a high-frequency support mode (second gaming state) in which the probability of entering the ball is high, and functions as a gaming state switching unit that switches between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “the most advantageous result”, the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until it becomes “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. . Further, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), and then from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, if the game result is an “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, the player will be a “big win” at least in the winning / losing lottery after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Until then, a game ball can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 51 at least until the “hit and win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game result is “low-probability result”, after the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, until the player executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via a right-handed route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no frequency limit and a high-frequency support mode with a frequency limit of 100 times, so that a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game are set. However, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

Here, when the operation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is opened, the player generates a ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C of the cruiser 53 or enters the non-electrically-powered object 51. It is possible to select whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, for example, the player shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is opened, and if the game result is “an explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “the most advantageous result”, By aiming to enter the 16-round execution gate or the 4-round execution gate, the high-probability mode can be continued while the non-electrically-powered object 51 is kept open. After that, the player shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is opened, and when the game result is a “low-accuracy result”, by aiming to enter the non-electric-powered object 51, Since the non-electrically-powered object 51 can be shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player executes the game 100 times after the non-electrically-charged object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode until then, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the left-handed route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the reversing ball entry means has shifted from the open state to the closed state when one game ball is entered, but is opened when two or more game balls are entered. You may transfer from a state to a closed state.
When the reversing entrance means is configured as described above, for example, the player maintains the open state of the reversing entrance means even after the first game ball has entered the reversing entrance means. Since it is possible, the order which aims at a round game execution gate can be diversified. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the player's options, and can further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters the game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. A cruising 53 that enables a ball is provided, and the cruising 53 includes holes 533A to 533C for starting a game in an opening / closing execution mode when a game ball enters, so that the player can play a game state with the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the game balls to enter the holes 533A to 533C. Further, the hole 533A shifts the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, so that the player can change the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode by the main controller 60. After the transition, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the non-electrically-powered object 51 to enter the game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A is more than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by causing the Kleung 53 to enter the game ball. . In addition, when the non-electrically-charged object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in response to the game ball entering the hole 533A, the player opens the game state next time by the main controller 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 51, thereby giving the player a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode starting when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode to be given can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game balls into the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the game balls enter the holes 533A. The entry is based on the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C by starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Therefore, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(4) The game state transition process is performed in an open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of open / close of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined number Since the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533 </ b> A to 533 </ b> C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the cruiser 53, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the cruiser 53. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.
(6) The non-electrical accessory 51 is moved from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-like body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After the player has finished the game in the open / close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (until the mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the operation port 37. After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 35 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53 provided in the left region of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, enters the hole 533A of the crune 53, falls downward, and connects the communication passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the non-electrically-charged object 51 shifts the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the hole 533 </ b> A of the cruiser 53 is always guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53A provided in the left region of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the crune 53A is not necessarily electric. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the accessory 51.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view in which the vicinity of the croon is enlarged and viewed obliquely from above.
As shown in FIG. 36, the crune 53A is provided along a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls a game ball guided to the clune 53A via the guide rail 525, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 531. A side wall 532, a columnar rotating body 537 that is disposed below the rolling surface 531 and that is rotatable around the central axis, and a tray 538 that is disposed below the rotating body 537 are provided. Yes.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and is formed with three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals, and formed at the center thereof, and each of the holes 533A to 533A to 533A. And a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the clown 53A via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. Middle arrow A).

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k is inserted into the hole 533C. A game ball is detected. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls 533A to 533C are entered, unlike the cases where the balls are entered into the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect a winning game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the round game is started. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and a predetermined number of round games are started.

Specifically, when the ball entering the hole 533A occurs, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games, and therefore starts executing 16 round games in the hole 533A. In order to suggest this, a mark is displayed around the hole 533A.
The pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times when the balls 533B and 533C are entered, and thus starts executing the round game four times in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not displayed to suggest you.

As described above, in this embodiment, the cruising 53A flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. It functions as a variable pitching means that makes it possible to enter the ball temporarily.
In addition, the cron 53A is provided with holes 533A to 533C (a plurality of entering portions) for entering the game balls that have entered the cron 53A. The crune 53A has a rolling surface 531 that rolls a game ball that has entered the croon 53A, and a plurality of balls are provided on the rolling surface 531 and a game that rolls on the rolling surface 531. Let the ball enter. Specifically, the rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and includes a plurality of ball entering portions provided so as to be equally spaced from each other.

In the present embodiment, the plurality of ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53A, and enter the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531. On the other hand, the plurality of entering parts may be provided, for example, in a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls entered into the variable entering means to any of the plurality of entering parts. In this case, the probability of distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entering portions by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable entry means only needs to have a plurality of entry parts.
In the present embodiment, the variable pitching means includes a plurality of pitching portions, but the variable pitching means may include a single pitching portion.

  Here, as described above, the non-electrically-powered accessory 51 and the hole 533A (second ball entry portion) are 16-round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Moreover, each hole 533B, 533C (first entrance part) is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to players.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number of times (4 in the present embodiment) to open and close the variable prize-winning device 38 when a game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing the variable prize-winning device 38 is larger than the predetermined number (in this embodiment, when the game balls enter the non-electrically-charged object 51 and the hole 533A). 16 times), the game in the open / close execution mode is started in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed, thereby setting the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. For example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, the holes 533B and 533C are set. The player may be given higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. In short, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the reversing entrance means and the second entrance part is the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance part. What is necessary is just to give a player a higher value than a game.

  In the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. The correspondence relationship between 533A to 533C, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameability, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

The rotating body 537 is formed in a circular shape on the upper surface thereof, and has upper openings 537A1 to 537A3 formed at positions corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, and is formed in a circular shape on the lower surface thereof, and the upper opening 537A1. To 537A3 and lower openings 537B1 to 537B3.
The lower opening 537B1 opens so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball that has entered the holes 533 A to 533 C and dropped downward and entered the upper opening 537 A 1 is a rotating body formed inside the rotating body 537. The fluid is discharged from the lower opening 537B1 through the passage 537C1 (see arrow B1 in the figure).

The lower opening 537B2 opens directly below the upper opening 537A2. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball that has entered the holes 533 A to 533 C and dropped downward and entered the upper opening 537 A 2 is a rotating body formed inside the rotating body 537. The gas is discharged from the lower opening 537B2 through the passage 537C2 (see arrow B2 in the figure).
The lower opening 537B3 opens immediately below the upper opening 537A3. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball that has entered any of the holes 533 A to 533 C and dropped downward and entered the upper opening 537 A 3 is a rotating body formed inside the rotating body 537. The fluid is discharged from the lower opening 537B3 through the passage 537C3 (see arrow B3 in the figure).

The tray 538 includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 538A that rolls the game ball that has been discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 and dropped downward, and a side wall 538B that is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 538A. I have.
The rolling surface 538A includes a cylindrical tubular portion 538A1 formed concentrically at the center position. The cylindrical portion 538A1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B1 to the communication passage 538C. This communication path 538C guides the game ball to the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the same manner as the communication path 535 in the first embodiment (see arrow C in the figure).
The side wall 538B includes a rectangular opening 538B1 formed on the side. The opening 538B1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 to the discharge passage 538D. The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35), similarly to the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment.

Here, the rolling surface 538A is inclined so as to descend toward the opening 538B1 side.
Therefore, the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 rolls on the rolling surface 538A and is then guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see arrow D in the figure). .

The rotating body 537 is formed on the lower surface thereof, and has a circular groove 537D formed concentrically with the central axis of the rotating body 537, and a gear (not shown) formed on the peripheral surface thereof. And a rotating body drive unit 537E (see FIG. 37) that rotates the rotating body 537 through this gear.
The groove portion 537 </ b> D is engaged with the side wall 538 </ b> B of the tray 538 so that the rotating body 537 is placed on the tray 538 and the rotating body 537 is positioned with respect to the tray 538.
The rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537.
In this embodiment, the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed, but the rotation speed may be changed.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power source for executing launch control for causing the game ball launching mechanism 81 to fire the game ball. And a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the backpack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when opened, or may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a substrate box is configured by combining a plurality of case bodies, and a connection portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or peeling is performed. At this time, a configuration in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off due to the adhesive layer remaining on the adhesion target can be applied so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure etc. which apply | coat an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between these case bodies can be employ | adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are formed as one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured as separate chips. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success / failure table storage area 63a, a sorting table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electric utility reservation area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

  The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40 a to 40 k, and a non-electrically-powered object opening detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37, a variable prize driving unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. Rotation that rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a blade member driving section 521c that opens and closes 521a, a plate driving section 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, and a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 The body drive unit 537E, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the state where the electric combination is released, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination driving unit 37b to open and close the electric combination 37a. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the special winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 performs driving control of the blade member driving unit 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate driving unit 523c to open / close the plate 523a. In addition, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the rotating body driving unit 537E to rotate the rotating body 537. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each of the operation ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each through gate 41.

<Flow for switching to open / close execution mode>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electrically-powered accessory, and the right variable pitching mechanism when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-charged object is not opened. In FIG. 38, the non-electrically-powered object 51 is simplified and shown at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 38 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. FIGS. 38B and 38C are views showing the non-electrically-powered object 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIGS. 38D and 38E are views showing the non-electrically-powered article 51 that is in an open state after a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. FIG. 38 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the MPU 102 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is not opened, the display screen of the symbol display device 47 displays each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the lower left position of G, and the fluctuation | variation display of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the MPU 92 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received a non-opening command. An effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determining process in step S1602 is set. The MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel line “Aim at the croon by right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the player can make a right-hand hit. Suggest.

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball is inclined by the blade member 521a. Is used to enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is guided by the guide rail 525. Be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the cruise 53 through the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When the entrance to the holes 533B and 533C (4-round execution gate) has occurred, the MPU 92 determines that the 4-round execution command has been received in step S1607. Therefore, in step S1608, the 4-round execution effect. In step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process in step S1608 is set. The MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (D), the MPU 102 displays an angel line “4R confirmed! Right-handed!” That exists in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to inform the player that the execution of four round games is started.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 4-round execution gate.
When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the game ball passes through one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 and falls to the receiving tray 538. .
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops as shown in FIG.

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C and comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the game ball is, as shown in FIG. After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is not open. A normal performance that is not notified to the user is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the communication path after the ball enters the 4-round execution gate.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops as shown in FIG.

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball is, as shown in FIG. It will be guided to the communication passage 538C through the cylindrical portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electrically-powered object 51. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the communication passage 538C shifts the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the closed state to the open state.

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the communication passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric-powered object 51 is open. The release notification effect for notifying the player of the release of is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), the MPU 102 displays an angel line “the next jackpot is left-handed and 16R is determined!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Then, the player is notified of the release of the non-electrically-powered object 51.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops. The game ball waits without entering the holes 533A to 533C until the holes 533A to 533C communicate with the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537. In other words, the game ball does not enter until the holes 533A to 533C communicate with the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.

Here, when the operation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is opened, the player generates a ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C of the cruiser 53 or enters the non-electrically-powered object 51. It is possible to select whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, for example, the player can first aim to enter the 16-round execution gate of the cruiser 53, resulting in 16 rounds. If it is waiting to enter the 4-round execution gate instead of the execution gate, it is possible to further aim to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51. Then, when the entry to the non-electrically-powered object 51 can be generated while waiting for the entry to the 4-round execution gate of the Kroon 53, the execution of 16 round games can be started. . According to this, the player can switch which round game execution gate is aimed according to the situation, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device, a non-electrically-powered accessory, and a right-hand variable pitching mechanism when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-charged object is not opened. In FIG. 41, the non-electrically-powered object 51 is simplified and shown in the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 41A is a diagram showing a display screen G when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 41 (B) and 41 (C) are diagrams showing the non-electrically-powered object 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIGS. 41D and 41E are views showing the non-electrically-powered object 51 that is in an open state after a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 41 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electrical power item 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the MPU 102 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is not opened, the display screen of the symbol display device 47 displays each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the lower left position of G, and the fluctuation | variation display of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the MPU 92 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received a non-opening command. An effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determining process in step S1602 is set. The MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel line “Aim at the croon by right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the player can make a right-hand hit. Suggest.

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball is inclined by the blade member 521a. Is used to enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is guided by the guide rail 525. Be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the cruise 53 through the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.

  If a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that a 16 round execution command has been received in step S1610. The process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process in step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 round execution effect based on the 16 round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (D), the MPU 102 angel line “16R confirmed! Right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to inform the player that the execution of 16 round games is started.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 16-round execution gate.
When a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the game ball passes through any one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 and falls to the tray 538.
When a ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops as shown in FIG.

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A and comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the game ball is, as shown in FIG. After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 41, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is not open. A normal performance that is not notified to the user is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode.

FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the communication path after a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate.
In addition, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops as shown in FIG.

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533A is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A and comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotator 537 and stops and then communicates with the rotator passage 537C1, the game ball is, as shown in FIG. It will be guided to the communication passage 538C through the cylindrical portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electrically-powered object 51. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the communication passage 538C shifts the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the closed state to the open state.

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the present embodiment, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. It is determined that the game result is “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the communication passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric-powered object 51 is open. The release notification effect for notifying the player of the release of is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode. Thereafter, the MPU 102 displays an angelic line “the next jackpot is left-handed and 16R is confirmed!” Displayed in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 41 (F). Then, the player is notified of the release of the non-electrically-powered object 51.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 rotates with the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 as the central axis, and enters the game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C. The rotating body 537 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C, and includes a plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 for guiding the game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C. . The plurality of rotator passages 537C1 to 537C3 are provided with a rotator passage 537C2 and a rotator passage 537C3 (first rotator) that do not cause the non-electrical accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters. Passage) and a rotator passage 537C1 (second rotator passage) for shifting the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. Therefore, the rotating body 537 and the receiving tray 538 serve as an open / close lottery unit for lottering whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters the holes 533A to 533C. It is functioning.

  In the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 and the tray 538 are employed as the open / close lottery unit. For example, as in the case of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the counter A lottery using may be adopted. In short, the open / close lottery section can draw any kind of lottery as long as it can determine whether or not the reverse entry means is to be shifted from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters the entrance part. May be.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is easy to generate a game ball entering the upper working port 36 and is difficult to generate a game ball entering the lower working port 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided, which makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the operating port 37 and hardly generates a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electrically-powered object 51 is disposed on the left-hand route.

In addition, the main control device 60 has a low-frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operation port 37 is lower than the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 than the upper operation port 36. And a high-frequency support mode (second gaming state) in which the probability of entering the ball is high, and functions as a gaming state switching unit that switches between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “the most advantageous result”, the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until it becomes “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. . Further, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), and then from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, if the game result is an “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, the player will be a “big win” at least in the winning / losing lottery after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Until then, a game ball can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 51 at least until the “hit and win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game result is “low-probability result”, after the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, until the player executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via a right-handed route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no frequency limit and a high-frequency support mode with a frequency limit of 100 times, so that a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game are set. However, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters the game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. The cruising 53A includes a hole 53A to 533C for starting a game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters, so that the player can play the game state with the main control device 60. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the game balls to enter the holes 533A to 533C. In addition, the cruiser 53A includes a rotating body 537 and a saucer 538 that draw lots whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters the holes 533A to 533C. Therefore, when the lottery executed in the rotating body 537 and the tray 538 is won and the non-electrical accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the main control device 60. After shifting the gaming state to the next opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the non-electrically-powered object 51 to enter the gaming ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A is more than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by causing the cruiser 53A to enter the game ball. . In addition, when the lottery executed by the rotating body 537 is won and the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player changes the game state to the next time using the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-operated object 51, so that the player has higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. The game of the opening / closing execution mode to be given to can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game balls into the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the game balls enter the holes 533A. The entry is based on the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C by starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Therefore, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(4) The game state transition process is performed in an open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of open / close of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined number Since the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(5) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53A, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(6) The open / close lottery section includes a rotating body 537 that rotates around the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 as a center axis and receives game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C. Rotating body passages 537C2 and 537C3 that do not shift the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, and the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the closed state when the game ball enters And a rotator passage 537C1 to be shifted to. According to this, the open / close lottery unit independently closes the non-electrically-powered object 51 without being affected by the cron 53A having the holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters. Whether or not to shift from the state to the open state can be drawn. In addition, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C to enter the rotary body passage 537C1 of the rotary body 537, After entering the next opening / closing execution mode in the main control device 60, the player causes the non-electrically-charged object 51 to enter the game ball to enter the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start a game in an opening / closing execution mode that gives a player a higher value than a game in the opening / closing execution mode to be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electrical accessory 51 is moved from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-like body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(8) After the player has finished the game in the opening / closing execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (until the mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the operation port 37. After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53 provided in the left region of the right variable pitching mechanism 52, enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate) of the crune 53, and falls downward. Then, the game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the communication passage 535 has moved the non-electrically-charged object 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the 16-round execution gate is always guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes the cron 53B provided in the left region of the right variable entry mechanism 52, and the game sphere that has entered the 16 round execution gate of the cron 53B is not necessarily the same. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the non-electrically-powered object 51.

FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view in which the vicinity of the croon is enlarged and viewed obliquely from above.
As shown in FIG. 45, the cruising 53 </ b> B includes a first cruising 55 connected to the guide rail 525 and a second cruising 56 disposed below the first cruising 55.
The first croon 55 includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 551 that rolls a game ball guided to the first croon 55 via the guide rail 525, and a side wall 552 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 551. It has.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552.

The rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and is formed with two holes 553A, 553B formed at equal intervals from each other, and at the center thereof, and each hole 553A, And a protrusion 554 having two side surfaces inclined so as to descend toward the 553B side. The rolling surface 551 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 552 side toward the holes 553A and 553B.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the first croon 55 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. (See arrow A in the figure).

  Each of the holes 553A and 553B includes detection sensors 40i and 40j (see FIG. 114) that detect the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i and 40j are disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553A, and the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553B. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls 553A and 553B are entered, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i and 40j may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect the winnings of the game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the detection sensor 40i detects a game ball entering the hole 553A, the hole 553A functions as a 16-round execution gate. Further, since the detection sensor 40j detects a game ball entering the hole 553B, the hole 553B functions as a 4-round execution gate. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor 40k is different from the first embodiment in that it is not used.

  Each of the holes 553A and 553B wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the round game is started. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters the holes 553A, 553B occurs, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and a predetermined number of round games are started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 553A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games, and therefore starts executing 16 round games in the hole 553A. In order to suggest this, a mark is displayed around the hole 553A.
In addition, when the entrance to the hole 553B occurs, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times, so it is suggested that the hole 553B starts executing the four round games. The mark is not displayed.

  Further, the first croon 55 includes a guide rail 555A that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553A to the second croon 56, and a guide rail 555B that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553B to the second croon 56. I have.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first croon 55 flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as an opportunity. It functions as a variable ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter temporarily.
In addition, the first croon 55 includes holes 553A and 553B (a plurality of ball entering portions) into which game balls that have entered the first croon 55 are entered. The first croon 55 has a rolling surface 551 that rolls the game ball that has entered the first croon 55, and the plurality of balls are provided on the rolling surface 551 and the rolling surface 551. Enter the rolling game ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 551 and includes a plurality of ball entering portions provided at equal intervals.

In the present embodiment, the plurality of ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first crew 55, and enter the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 551. On the other hand, the plurality of entering parts may be provided, for example, in a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls entered into the variable entering means to any of the plurality of entering parts. In this case, the probability of distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entering portions by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable entry means only needs to have a plurality of entry parts.
In the present embodiment, the variable pitching means includes a plurality of pitching portions, but the variable pitching means may include a single pitching portion.

  Here, as described above, the non-electrically-powered accessory 51 and the hole 553A (second entry portion) are 16-round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Further, the hole 553B (first entry portion) is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Are granted to

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment) of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 when a game ball enters the hole 553B, so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. The game in the opening / closing execution mode that can be paid out is started, and the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number (16 times in the present embodiment) when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and hole 553A By setting to, the game in the opening / closing execution mode is started in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 553A is set in the game to the hole 553B by setting the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38. The player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the ball is entered. For example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, the game ball is inserted into the hole 553B. The player may be given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts at the time of the ball. In short, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the reversing entrance means and the second entrance part is the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance part. What is necessary is just to give a player a higher value than a game.

  In this embodiment, the hole 553A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, the hole 553B is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each of the holes 553A and 553B. The correspondence between the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence relationship between the holes 553A and 553B and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence relationship is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameability, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

The second croon 56 is provided along a disc-shaped rolling surface 561 that rolls a game ball guided to the second croon 56 via the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 561. Side wall 562.
The guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B guide the game ball to the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562.

The rolling surface 561 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and is formed with three holes 563A to 563C formed at equal intervals from each other, and at the center thereof, and each of the holes 563A to 563A. And a protrusion 564 having three side surfaces inclined so as to descend toward the 563C side. Further, the rolling surface 561 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 562 side toward the holes 563A to 563C.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the second cruiser 56 via the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C. (See arrow B in the figure).

  In addition, the second croon 56 is connected to a hole 563A formed on the front side (front side in the figure) of the game board 31 and enters the hole 563A and moves downward as indicated by an arrow C in the figure. It is connected to a communication passage 565 for guiding the dropped game ball to the non-electrically-powered object 51, and two holes 563B and 563C formed on the back side (the back side in the figure) of the game board 31, and an arrow D in the figure. As shown in FIG. 4, a discharge passage 566 for discharging the game ball that has entered the holes 563B and 563C and dropped downward to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 44) is provided.

Since the communication path 565 guides the game ball to the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the same manner as the communication path 535 in the first embodiment, the hole 563A suggests that the game ball is guided to the non-electric-powered object 51. In this way, marks are displayed around the hole 563A.
Since the discharge passage 566 discharges game balls to the game area in the same manner as the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment, the holes 563B and 563C have holes 563B so as to indicate that the game balls are discharged to the game area. No mark is displayed around 563C.

<Flow for switching to open / close execution mode>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable pitching mechanism when the non-electrical accessory is not opened and the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode. In FIG. 46, the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shown in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 46 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the opening / closing execution mode. 46 (B) and 46 (C) are diagrams showing the non-electrically-powered object 51 that has not been opened after the ball enters the 4-round execution gate. 46 (D) and 46 (E) are diagrams showing the non-electrically-powered article 51 that is in an open state after a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIG. 46 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the release notification effect for notifying the player of the release of the non-electrical power item 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the MPU 102 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is not opened, the display screen of the symbol display device 47 displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the lower left position of G, and the fluctuation | variation display of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the MPU 92 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received a non-opening command. An effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determining process in step S1602 is set. The MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel line “Aim at the croon by right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the player can make a right-hand hit. Suggest.

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball is inclined by the blade member 521a. Is used to enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is guided by the guide rail 525. Be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the first crew 55 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the first croon 55 of the clown 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the Kroon when entering the 4-round execution gate occurs. Specifically, FIG. 47A is a top view of the first croon 55, and FIGS. 47B and 47C are top views of the second croon 56.
For example, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 47A, when a ball enters the hole 553B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 receives a four-round execution command in step S1607. Therefore, in step S1608, a 4-round execution effect determination process is executed. In step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process in step S1608 is executed. Set. The MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (D), the MPU 102 displays an angel line “4R confirmed! Right-handed!” That exists in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to inform the player that the execution of four round games is started.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

In addition, when a ball enters the hole 553B (four-round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second croon 56 through the guide rail 555B. The game ball rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47B, when a ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is not open, so that the non-electric-powered object 51 is opened as an ending effect. A normal performance that is not notified to the user is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode.

  For example, as shown by an arrow in FIG. 47C, when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 565. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the communication passage 565 shifts the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state.

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric-powered object 51 is open, so that the non-electric-powered object 51 is used as an ending effect. The release notification effect for notifying the player of the release of is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode. Thereafter, the MPU 102 displays an angel line “next jackpot is left-handed and 16R is confirmed!” Displayed at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 46 (F). Then, the player is notified of the release of the non-electrically-powered object 51.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device, a non-electrically-powered accessory, and a right variable pitching mechanism when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrically-charged object is not opened. FIG. 48 shows a simplified non-electrically-powered object 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 48 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the opening / closing execution mode. 48 (B) and 48 (C) are diagrams showing the non-electrically-powered object 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. 48 (D) and 48 (E) are diagrams showing the non-electrically-powered object 51 that is in an open state after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 48 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the MPU 102 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the display screen of the symbol display device 47 displays each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the lower left position of G, and the fluctuation | variation display of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the MPU 92 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received a non-opening command. An effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determining process in step S1602 is set. The MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel line “Aim at the croon by right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the player can make a right-hand hit. Suggest.

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 executes a cruise route setting process. In the setting process of the clune route, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the clune route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball is inclined by the blade member 521a. Is used to enter the right variable entrance mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, when the cruise route is set by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is guided by the guide rail 525. Be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the cruise 53 through the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the first croon 55 of the clown 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 49 is a top view of the Kroon when entering the 16-round execution gate occurs. Specifically, FIG. 49A is a top view of the first croon 55, and FIGS. 49B and 49C are top views of the second croon 56.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49A, when a ball enters the hole 553A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 receives a 16 round execution command in step S1610. In step S1611, the 16-round execution effect determination process is executed. In step S1612, the 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process in step S1611 is executed. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 round execution effect based on the 16 round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) and 48 (D), the MPU 102 angel line “16R confirmed! Right-handed!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to inform the player that the execution of 16 round games is started.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable pitching mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

In addition, when a ball enters the hole 553A (16-round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second cruiser 56 via the guide rail 555A. The game ball rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49B, when a ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrically-powered object 51 is not open, so that the non-electric-powered object 51 is opened as an ending effect. A normal performance that is not notified to the user is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode.

  For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49C, when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 565. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the communication passage 565 shifts the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state.

  Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. An effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result”. In addition, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect C2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, and thus performs a non-electrically-powered object opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 in the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric-powered object 51 is open, so that the non-electric-powered object 51 is used as an ending effect. The release notification effect for notifying the player of the release of is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. By displaying the angel's line “Probability rush!”, The player is informed that the mode has been switched to the high probability mode. After that, the MPU 102 displays an angel line “next jackpot is left-handed and 16R is confirmed!” Displayed in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. Then, the player is notified of the release of the non-electrically-powered object 51.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second croon 56 functions as a lottery croon having the rolling surface 561 (the lottery rolling surface) that rolls the game balls that have entered the holes 553A and 553B. Yes. In addition, the second croon 56 is provided on the rolling surface 561, and includes holes 563A to 563C (a plurality of lottery entrances) for entering game balls rolling on the rolling surface 561. Then, the plurality of lottery entrance portions are provided with holes 563B and 563C (first lottery entrance portions) that do not cause the non-electrical accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. , A hole 563A (second lottery entry portion) for shifting the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters is provided. Therefore, the second Krune 56 functions as an open / close lottery unit that draws whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters the holes 553A and 553B. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the second Kroon 56 is used as the open / close lottery section. You may adopt a lottery. In short, the open / close lottery section can draw any kind of lottery as long as it can determine whether or not the reverse entry means is to be shifted from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters the entrance part. May be.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is easy to generate a game ball entering the upper working port 36 and is difficult to generate a game ball entering the lower working port 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided, which makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the operating port 37 and hardly generates a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electrically-powered object 51 is disposed on the left-hand route.

In addition, the main control device 60 has a low-frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operation port 37 is lower than the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 than the upper operation port 36. And a high-frequency support mode (second gaming state) in which the probability of entering the ball is high, and functions as a gaming state switching unit that switches between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “the most advantageous result”, the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until it becomes “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. . Further, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), and then from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, if the game result is an “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, the player will be a “big win” at least in the winning / losing lottery after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Until then, a game ball can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 51 at least until the “hit and win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game result is “low-probability result”, after the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, until the player executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via a right-handed route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no frequency limit and a high-frequency support mode with a frequency limit of 100 times, so that a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game are set. However, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters the game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. A first croon 55 that enables a ball is provided, and the first croon 55 includes holes 553A and 553B that start a game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters, so that the player can control the main controller 60. After the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode at, a game ball in each of the holes 553A and 553B can be entered to start the game in the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the first cron 55 includes a second cron 56 for drawing whether or not the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters the holes 553A and 553B. Therefore, when the lottery executed in the second Kroon 56 is won and the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player can play the game state in the main controller 60. After shifting to the next opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the non-electrically-charged object 51 to enter a game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Since the game is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by causing the first cron 55 to enter the game ball. Further, when the lottery executed in the second cruiser 56 is won and the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player changes the game state to the next time using the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B by causing the non-electrical accessory 51 to enter the game ball. A game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering a game ball into the hole 553B can start a game in an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. By starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls, the player has a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode starting when the game balls enter the hole 553B Therefore, the player expects to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(4) The game state transition processing starts the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the open / close count of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the hole 553B. Then, by setting the number of opening / closing of the variable prize-winning device 38 to be greater than the predetermined number when the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 553A, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are set. Therefore, the player expects to enter the hole 553A when starting a game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 553A and 553B are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first crew 55, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the first crew 55. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(6) The open / close lottery section uses the holes 563B and 563C that do not allow the non-electrical accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, and the non-electrical accessory when the game ball enters. A second cloak 56 having a hole 563A for shifting 51 from the closed state to the open state is provided. According to this, the open / close lottery unit independently operates the non-electrically-powered object 51 without being affected by the first cruiser 55 having the holes 553A and 553B for starting the game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters. Whether or not to shift from the closed state to the open state can be drawn. In addition, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the game balls that have entered the holes 553A and 553B to enter the hole 563A, the player can control the main controller 60. After the game state is shifted to the next opening / closing execution mode at, the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-charged object 51, so that the game is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. It is possible to start a game in an opening / closing execution mode in which value is given to the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electrical accessory 51 is moved from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-like body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(8) After the player has finished the game in the opening / closing execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (until the mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the operation port 37. After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 50 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the cron 53 provided in the left region of the right variable pitching mechanism 52. Then, the ball that has entered the hole 533A of the cruiser 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 535, the non-electrically-charged object 51 shifts from the closed state to the open state. I was letting. In addition, the game ball that has entered the holes 533B and 533C of the crune 53 and dropped downward has been discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 536.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a cron 53C provided in the left region of the right variable pitching mechanism 52 as shown in FIG. In addition, all the game balls that have entered any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 51) of the croon 53C shift the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state in the first embodiment. And different.

FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon as seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 51, the crune 53C is provided along a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls a game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 531. Side wall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and is formed with three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals, and formed at the center thereof, and each of the holes 533A to 533A to 533A. And a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. Middle arrow A).

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k is inserted into the hole 533C. A game ball is detected. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls 533A to 533C are entered, unlike the cases where the balls are entered into the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect a winning game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the round game is started. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and a predetermined number of round games are started.

Specifically, when the ball entering the hole 533A occurs, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games, and therefore starts executing 16 round games in the hole 533A. In order to suggest this, a mark is displayed around the hole 533A.
The pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times when the balls 533B and 533C are entered, and thus starts executing the round game four times in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not displayed to suggest you.

In addition, the cruiser 53C includes a communication path 535 for guiding the game ball to the non-electrically-powered object 51, and a guide path 539 for guiding the game ball that has entered the holes 533A to 533C and dropped downward to the communication path 535. I have.
The guide path 539 includes three upstream guide paths 539A connected to the holes 533A to 533C, and each of the upstream guide paths 539A and a downstream guide path 539B connected to the communication path 535. I have.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the clown 53C flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Can be temporarily entered, and functions as a variable entry means for shifting the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters.

  In addition, the cleon 53C includes holes 533B and 533C (first entry part) and a hole 533A (second entry part) for entering the game balls that have entered the cron 53C. The cruising 53C has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the cruising 53C, and the first and second entering portions are provided on the rolling surface 531, and A game ball rolling on the moving surface 531 is entered.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second balls are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53 and enter the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531. . On the other hand, the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion, for example, distribute the game balls that have entered the variable entrance means to the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probability that the game balls are distributed to the first and second balls by the sorting mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable pitching means only needs to include a first pitching portion and a second pitching portion.

  Here, as described above, the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Each of the holes 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to players.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number of times (4 in the present embodiment) to open and close the variable prize-winning device 38 when a game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing the variable prize-winning device 38 is larger than the predetermined number (in this embodiment, when the game balls enter the non-electrically-charged object 51 and the hole 533A). 16 times), the game in the open / close execution mode is started in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed, thereby setting the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. For example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, the holes 533B and 533C are set. The player may be given higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. In short, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the reversing entrance means and the second entrance part is the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance part. What is necessary is just to give a player a higher value than a game.

  In the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. The correspondence relationship between 533A to 533C, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameability, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is easy to generate a game ball entering the upper working port 36 and is difficult to generate a game ball entering the lower working port 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided, which makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the operating port 37 and hardly generates a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electrically-powered object 51 is disposed on the left-hand route.

In addition, the main control device 60 has a low-frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operation port 37 is lower than the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 than the upper operation port 36. And a high-frequency support mode (second gaming state) in which the probability of entering the ball is high, and functions as a gaming state switching unit that switches between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “the most advantageous result”, the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until it becomes “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. . Further, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), and then from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, if the game result is an “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, the player will be a “big win” at least in the winning / losing lottery after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Until then, a game ball can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 51 at least until the “hit and win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game result is “low-probability result”, after the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, until the player executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via a right-handed route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no frequency limit and a high-frequency support mode with a frequency limit of 100 times, so that a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game are set. However, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters the game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. A cloak 53C that enables a ball is provided, and the cloon 53C starts a game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters, so that the player shifts the gaming state to the opening / closing execution mode in the main controller 60, The game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the cron 53C to enter the game ball. In addition, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing a game ball to enter the cruiser 53 </ b> C, the player can open and close the game state next time by the main controller 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the non-electrically-powered object 51 to enter the game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A is more than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by causing the Kleung 53C to enter the game ball. . In addition, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing a game ball to enter the cruiser 53 </ b> C, the player can open and close the game state next time by the main controller 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 51, thereby giving the player a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode starting when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode to be given can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game balls into the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the game balls enter the holes 533A. The entry is based on the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C by starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Therefore, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(4) The game state transition process is performed in an open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of open / close of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 51 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined number Since the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(5) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53C, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53C. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.
(6) The non-electrical accessory 51 is moved from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-like body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After the player has finished the game in the open / close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (until the mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the operation port 37. After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 51 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is caused to enter the non-electrically-powered object 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 51 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player enters the game state in the opening / closing execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played in the hope of shifting.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of a game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the non-electrical accessory 51, and this non-electrical accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. In addition, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the cruiser 53 and dropped downward has been guided to the non-electrically-powered object 51 through the communication passage 535.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 has a cron 53D and a non-electrical accessory 57 as shown in FIG. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is provided on the upper side. In addition, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the crune 53D and dropped downward is different from the first embodiment in that it is guided to the non-electrically-powered object 57 via the communication passage 535D.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35, an upper operating port (first starting pitching portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting pitching portion) 37, a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening, An out port 39 and a non-electrically-operated accessory 57 are provided. The non-electrically-powered accessory 57 is provided on the upper side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. The game board 31 also has an opening 313 provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. In addition, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the central portion left side and the central portion right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 and various members (acts) such as a windmill in the game area so as to disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate. ing.

  The non-electric accessory 57 is provided on the right side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electrically-powered object 57 includes a detection sensor 40 f (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40 f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 57, unlike when the ball enters the various winning holes. The non-electrically-powered object 57 will be described in detail later.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G decreases due to the fall of the game ball. It has a configuration.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp portions 49a provided in the upper area of the symbol display device 47, and four second holding lamp portions 49b provided in the right area of the first holding lamp portion 49a. , And four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in the upper region of the first holding lamp portion 49a.
Further, the center frame 48 includes a right variable entrance mechanism 52 provided in a lower right area of the symbol display device 47, a clown 53D provided in a left area of the right variable entrance mechanism 52, and a symbol display. And a guide mechanism 58 provided in an upper right region of the device 47.

The right variable pitching mechanism 52 causes a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the right variable pitching mechanism 52, and then discharges it to the outside of the right variable pitching mechanism 52. By switching the discharge route to be performed, it has a function of guiding the game ball entered into the right side variable entry mechanism 52 to the cruise route or the discharge route.
Note that the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right variable entrance mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

The cron 53D has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment except for the communication passage 535.
Specifically, the crune 53D is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (near side) of the game board 31, and the game ball that has entered the hole 533A and dropped downward is removed from the non-electrically-powered object 57. A communication passage 535D is provided for guiding the vehicle.

The guide mechanism 58 has a function of guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the non-electrically-powered object 57. Specifically, the guide mechanism 58 has a passage that is divided into two guide rails that are curvedly provided so as to reach the non-electrically-powered object 57 from the upper part of the game area, and a plurality of guide mechanisms 58 are provided in the passage. It is formed in a width that prevents the game balls from passing simultaneously.
Note that the player hits the right with the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 27 slightly weaker than the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball at the upper part of the game area to the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the game ball can be guided to the inside of the guide mechanism 58 by reaching the inlet 58A of the guide mechanism 58 (weakening hit route).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the non-electrical accessory. Specifically, FIG. 53A is a view of the internal structure of the non-electrically-powered object 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 53B is a view of the internal structure of the non-electrically-charged object 57 viewed from the side. It is a figure.
As shown in FIG. 53, the non-electric accessory 57 is fixed to a pair of blade members 571 provided to face each other in the horizontal direction, and the lower end portion of each blade member 571, and the board surface of the game board 31. A pair of rotation shafts 572 provided to be rotatable about orthogonal axes and a pair of fan-like gears 573 fixed concentrically to the rotation shafts 572 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 53A, each blade member 571 has a facing surface 571 </ b> A that faces the horizontal direction and is arranged along the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. Each blade member 571 is provided in the game area (the front side of the game board 31) as shown in FIG. 53 (B).
Each blade member 571 is provided so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through a passage 571B formed between the opposing surfaces 571A at the same time. Further, the non-electrically-powered article 57 includes a baffle plate 57A provided above the entrance of the passage 571B. The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is narrower than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electrically-powered object 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B in the closed state of the non-electric-powered object 57.

Of each blade member 571, the left blade member 571 as viewed from the front side has a shaft body 571 </ b> C formed to have a central axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31.
The non-electrical accessory 57 includes a cover 574 provided in the game area so as to cover each blade member 571 and the passage 571B.

Further, the non-electrically-powered object 57 supports the first arm portion 575A that is in contact with the shaft body 571C from the upper side, and supports the first arm portion 575A and is centered on an axis that is orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. And a pair of rotating shafts 575B provided so as to be rotatable, and a fan-shaped gear 575C fixed to the rotating shaft 575B.
Further, the non-electrically-operated accessory 57 supports the gear 576A provided so as to mesh with the gear 575C, and supports the gear 576A, and is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pair of rotation shafts 576B provided and a second arm portion 576C fixed to the rotation shaft 576B are provided.

The second arm portion 576C is provided at a position for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge port formed below the communication passage 535D after entering the hole 533A of the clown 53D and falling downward.
Therefore, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the cruiser 53D and dropped downward and guided to the non-electrically-powered object 57 through the communication passage 535D has the second arm portion as shown in FIG. 53 (A). Drop toward 576C.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electrically-powered accessory when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 54 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electrically-powered object 57 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. It is a figure.
The game ball dropped toward the second arm portion 576C rotates the gear 576A and the second arm portion 576C around the rotation shaft 576B as shown by the arrow in FIG.
The game ball dropped toward the second arm portion 576C rotates the second arm portion 576C, and then travels along the second arm portion 576C using the inclination of the second arm portion 576C to the discharge passage 577. Enter the ball. The discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

  In addition, since the rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate with the rotation of the gear 576A, the first arm 575A rotates with the rotation of the gear 575C. Then, the first arm portion 575A pushes down the shaft body 571C toward the lower side. Each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotating shafts 572 as a central axis via a pair of gears 573 by pushing down the shaft body 571C by the first arm portion 575A. As a result, the non-electrically-powered object 57 shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electrically-powered object 57 includes a non-electric-powered object opening detection sensor 519 that detects the transition from the closed state to the open state, similarly to the non-electrically-charged object 51 in the first embodiment. . Note that the non-electric-powered object opening detection sensor 519 may be any sensor as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric-powered object 57. For example, a contact-type sensor or the like can be employed. .
The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57 </ b> A is wider than that of one game ball in the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 57. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electrically-powered object 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B when the non-electrically-charged object 57 is opened.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an internal structure of the non-electrically-powered object when a ball enters the non-electrically-charged object. Specifically, FIG. 55 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electrically-powered object 57 from the front side, and FIG. 55 (B) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electrically-charged object 57 from the side surface. It is a figure.
As shown by the arrows in FIG. 55, the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electrically-powered object 57 through the guide mechanism 58 passes through the right facing surface 571A of each facing surface 571A as viewed from the front side. It reaches the center position of the opposing surface 571A.

FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating the internal structure of the non-electrically-powered object after the ball entering the non-electrically-charged object occurs. Specifically, FIG. 56 (A) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electrically-powered object 57 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. It is a figure.
As shown by the arrows in FIG. 56, the game ball that has reached the center position of the opposing surface 571A falls downward while rotating each blade member 571. Specifically, each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotation shafts 572 as a central axis via a pair of gears 573.
Note that the game balls that have fallen downward while rotating each blade member 571 enter the discharge communication passage 578. The discharge communication passage 578 guides the game ball to the discharge passage 577 described above, and the discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

  Of the blade members 571, the blade member 571 on the left side as viewed from the front side pushes up the shaft body 571C upward and pushes up the first arm portion 575A upward. Then, the rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate as the first arm portion 575A rotates.

  In addition, since the gear 576A and the rotation shaft 576B rotate as the gear 575C rotates, the second arm portion 576C rotates as the gear 576A rotates. Then, the second arm portion 576C rises and returns to the original position. As a result, the non-electrically-powered object 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

  The non-electrical component 57 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the round game is started. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, when the ball enters the non-electrically-operated accessory 57, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and a predetermined number of round games are started.

  Here, the entrance to the non-electrically-powered object 57 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 577 by the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the opened state of the non-electrically-powered object 57, a game ball that has entered the non-electrically-charged object 57 via the entrance of the passage 571B, and in the closed state of the non-electrically-charged object 57, via the communication path 535D. Both the game balls guided by the non-electrically-powered object 57 are determined as balls entering the non-electrically-powered object 57.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when a ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 57, so the non-electrically-powered object 57 includes 16 rounds. A character “16R” indicating that the game is started is displayed (see FIG. 52).
In this embodiment, the non-electrically-powered object 57 and the hole 533A that start the execution of 16 round games are referred to as a 16-round execution gate, and the holes 533B and 533C that start the execution of 4 round games are 4 This is called a round execution gate, and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate are also collectively referred to as a round game execution gate.

As described above, the non-electrically-powered object 57 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, As an opportunity, it functions as a reversing ball entry means that shifts from an open state to a closed state.
The non-electrically-powered object 57 includes each blade member 571 (first receiving portion) that receives a game ball that has entered the non-electrically-related object 57 and a second arm portion 576C that receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A ( A second receiving portion), and when the game balls are received by the respective blade members 571, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and the game balls are received by the second arm portion 576C to be released from the closed state. Transition to the state.

  In the present embodiment, the reversing entrance means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and closes by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part. Transitioned from a state to an open state. On the other hand, the reversing ball entry means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the reversing ball entry means in either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. The reverse intrusion means may be shifted from the open state to the closed state by the drive unit upon detection of the entry of the ball. In short, the reversing ball entry means has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and is opened when the game ball enters. What is necessary is just to transfer from a state to a closed state.

  In addition, the cron 53D enters the game ball that has entered the cron 53D, and the holes 533B and 533C (first) that do not cause the non-electrically-powered object 57 to shift from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. ) And a hole 533A (the second hole for allowing the non-electrically-powered object 57 to transition from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the game ball and the game ball that has entered the Kleon 53D. The entrance part). In addition, the Kleung 53D has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the Kleon 53D, and the first and second pitched portions are provided on the rolling surface 531. A game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531 is entered.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the cruiser 53D, and enter the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531. . On the other hand, the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion, for example, distribute the game balls that have entered the variable entrance means to the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probability that the game balls are distributed to the first and second balls by the sorting mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable pitching means only needs to include a first pitching portion and a second pitching portion.

  Here, as described above, the non-electrically-powered object 57 and the hole 533A are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Each of the holes 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 57 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to players.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number of times (4 in the present embodiment) to open and close the variable prize-winning device 38 when a game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number (in this embodiment) when the game balls are inserted into the non-electrically-charged object 57 and the hole 533A. 16 times), the game in the open / close execution mode is started in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 57 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed to thereby set the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. For example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, the holes 533B and 533C are set. The player may be given higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game. In short, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the reversing entrance means and the second entrance part is the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance part. What is necessary is just to give a player a higher value than a game.

  In the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. The correspondence relationship between 533A to 533C, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameability, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is easy to generate a game ball entering the upper working port 36 and is difficult to generate a game ball entering the lower working port 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided, which makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the operating port 37 and hardly generates a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. Further, the non-electrically-powered object 57 is disposed on a weak beating route (third route) different from the left-handed route and the right-handed route.

In addition, the main control device 60 has a low-frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operation port 37 is lower than the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 than the upper operation port 36. And a high-frequency support mode (second gaming state) in which the probability of entering the ball is high, and functions as a gaming state switching unit that switches between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “the most advantageous result”, the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until it becomes “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. . Further, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), and then from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, if the game result is an “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, the player will be a “big win” at least in the winning / losing lottery after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Until then, a game ball can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrically-powered object 51 at least until the “hit and win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game result is “low-probability result”, after the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, until the player executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via a right-handed route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Further, since the non-electrically-powered object 57 is disposed on the weakly hitting route, the player causes the game ball to be fired in a different route from the case where the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Thus, a game ball can be entered into the non-electrically-powered object 57. Therefore, when the non-electrically-powered object 57 is disposed on the weaker hitting route, the player moves the non-electrically-powered object 57 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. In addition, even if the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the non-electrically-powered object 57 does not enter the game ball. In this case, since the non-electrically-powered object 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no frequency limit and a high-frequency support mode with a frequency limit of 100 times, so that a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game are set. However, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters the game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. A cruising 53D that enables a ball is provided, and the cruising 53D starts a game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters, so that the player shifts the gaming state to the opening / closing execution mode in the main controller 60, The game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the cruel 53D to enter the game ball. In addition, when the non-electrically-powered object 57 is shifted from the closed state to the opened state by causing the game ball 53D to enter the clown 53D, the player can open and close the next game state by the main controller 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by causing the non-electrically-powered object 57 to enter the game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game. Further, since the non-electrically-powered object 57 is disposed on the weakly hitting route, the player causes the game ball to be fired in a different route from the case where the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Thus, a game ball can be entered into the non-electrically-powered object 57. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can reliably reflect the player's intention, and can make the player play a game comfortably.

(2) After the player has finished the game in the opening / closing execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (until the mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), A game turn can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the operation port 37. After that, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, so that the player can play a game by placing the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. In addition, since the non-electric player 57 is arranged on the weaker hitting route, the player moves the non-electric player 57 from the closed state to the open state and then executes 100 game times. In addition, even if the game state is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the non-electrically-powered object 57 does not enter the game ball. Accordingly, since the non-electrically-powered object 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(3) The game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electrically-powered object 57 and the hole 533A is more than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by causing the cruiser 53D to enter the game ball. . In addition, when the non-electrically-powered object 57 is shifted from the closed state to the opened state by causing the game ball 53D to enter the clown 53D, the player can open and close the next game state by the main controller 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 57, thereby giving the player a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode starting when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. The game in the opening / closing execution mode to be given can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's choices and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The entry of the game balls into the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in the opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. The entry is based on the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C by starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Therefore, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(5) The game state transition process is an open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of open / close of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is inserted into the non-electrically-powered object 57 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(6) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53D, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53D. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.
(7) The non-electrically-powered object 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each blade member 571, and from the closed state by receiving the game ball at the second arm portion 576C. Since the state is shifted to the open state, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

[Modification of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes one open / close of the big prize opening 38a for one round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the opening / closing of the large prize winning opening 38a a plurality of times per round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state, or a game to the big prize opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches the predetermined upper limit, the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the open / close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to an open state, and then the total number of game balls to be awarded to the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to an arbitrary number other than eight. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number differently according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number different for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes after the opening / closing door 38b is set in the open state, and the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end opportunity to set the open / close door 38b in a closed state when a game ball enters, and this end is performed when a predetermined time elapses. You may be comprised so that the entrance to an opportunity may be enabled.
(5) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 closes the open / close door 38b again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state. It was set to. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the winning of the special winning opening 38a occurs after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state. The closed state may be set again.

(6) In the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the open / close door 38b again after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set to be shorter than the game ball firing cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the launching period of the game ball, and is not more than n times (n = 1, 2, 3) or less of the launching period of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed twice with a short duration upper limit duration, and an opening / closing execution in which a round game is executed 4 or 16 times with a long duration upper limit duration. Had a mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these with respect to the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of executions of the round game. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured by changing the degree of opening of the open / close door 38b such as half open or full open instead of the configuration of setting a plurality of types of open / close execution modes by changing the upper limit duration mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it appears to the player in the same mode.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or selected by lottery from a plurality of types of effects. The selection rate may be set different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any one of “special out-of-game result”, “non-explicit small round high-precision result”, and “explicit small-round high-precision result”. Information related to a special symbol combination was determined as a stop result to be finally stopped on the line L, and this special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may determine information related to the stop result at random and make it difficult for the player to know which game result it is.

(11) In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for lottery generation for jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for lottery selection for jackpots when a jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery type lottery when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the big hit type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of out-of-range results: “special out-of-range results” and “normal out-of-range results”, and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number to win the jackpot occurrence The lottery for generating a jackpot is executed by comparing the winning / failing table and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery related to the “special loss result”. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the “special loss result”. A lottery related to “result” may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the gaming state in which the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for generating a big hit, there are two random value values that are “special outage results”, and the big win is generated. Under the gaming state in which the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, there is one random number value as the “special loss result”. In other words, the probability of the “special loss result” is set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of the “special outlier result” may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. May be. Further, the probability of the “special loss result” may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a game state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable game state by setting the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 in the first result display unit reservation area Ra, and the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 to the second result display unit. By storing in the storage area Rb, the storage information related to the upper operation port 36 and the storage information related to the lower operation port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the hold information related to the lower working port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 for digestion of game times regardless of whether there is hold information related to the upper operation port 36 or not. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 for digestion of game times in the order of winning of the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Thus, control of the display control apparatus 100 is executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command obtained as a result of analyzing the command to the sound light emission control device 90. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The commands transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. In contrast, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. The same control device as the control device 60 may be provided.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, the effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effects for game times are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game times by operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game times by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game-playing effect by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (winning lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display unit 45. The symbol display device 47 executes the variable display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and the internal lottery performed after starting the variable display as a result of stopping the variable display. The result may be displayed. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery may be executed and the setting of the stop result or the like may be executed.

(21) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 displays the variation display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a stop result of the variation display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the change display stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, the effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for game times on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery.

  For example, the symbol display device 47 assigns a predetermined area to at least one of the area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral area of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may not be displayed during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Here, as the symbols displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Moreover, even if it is not a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for a player to identify, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify by adopting a similar pattern or a combination thereof. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, is the same as the case where the lottery in which a big hit occurs is won by observing the symbol display device 47 without observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily check whether or not an illegal act is attempted to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate alone, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a gaming machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on the optical code is provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured such that information on the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by imaging and reading at and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured to receive the information of the web server by inputting the password issued by the player accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine. May be.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, for example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be other types of gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments will be described. Of the features of the present invention group, the configuration corresponding to each of the above embodiments is shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above embodiments, and Modifications, improvements, etc. within a range where the object can be achieved, and combinations of features are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the start ball entering means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the entry of the game ball into the start ball entering means as an opportunity, it is advantageous to the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to a specific control state,
An open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and from the open state to the closed state triggered by the entry of the game ball Reversing pitching means (non-electrically-powered object 51) to be transferred;
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, variable ball entry means (Kroon 53) that allows the game balls flowing down the game area to be temporarily entered. )
The variable pitching means is
A first ball entry portion (hole 533B, hole 533B, which causes the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter and that causes the reverse ball entry means not to change from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. 533C)
A second ball entry portion (hole 533A) for causing the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means to enter and for causing the reverse ball entry means to transition from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. And
The gaming state transition means includes
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state, the specific control state is set when the game ball enters any one of the reversing ball entry means, the first ball entry portion, and the second ball entry portion. A game machine comprising a specific control start unit (game state transition process) for starting a game.

  According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming balls enter the starting pitching means. Variable entry means that enables entry is provided, and the variable entry means includes a first entry part and a second entry part that start a game in a specific control state when entering a game ball. Then, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the player enters the game ball in the first entrance part or the second entrance part to enter the game in the specific control state. Can be started. Further, since the second entrance part shifts the inversion entrance means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, the player can specify the game state next time by the game state transition means. After shifting to the control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the reversing ball entry means to enter the game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entering part is the specific that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

  According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry portion is entered by the game ball entering the first ball entry portion. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball , Expecting to enter the second entrance. In addition, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the second ball entry part, the player changes the game state with the game state transfer means. After the transition to the next specific control state, by placing the game ball in the reversing ball entry means, higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit. A game in a specific control state given to the player can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when entering the game balls into the ball entering part, the game balls entering the first ball entering part A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than a game in the specific control state that is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the entering of the game ball into the first entrance part can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be dispensed, The game ball entering the second ball entrance part is a game ball entering the first ball entrance part by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the player enters the game, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player may enter the second entrance part. Expect. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed entrance ball having an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball Means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control start unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means in the open state, until it is set in the closed state again is one game of the specific control state (round game),
The specific control start unit
By setting the opening / closing number of times of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing ball entry means is larger than the predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times, a game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

  According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit sets a predetermined number of games by setting the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing means when the game ball enters the first ball entering unit. A game in a specific control state in which a ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing entrance means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number when entering the reversing entrance means and the second entry portion. Thus, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started, so that the player can start a game in the specific control state by going to the second pitching unit. Will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A crune (clun 53) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means;
The first and second ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface, and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

  According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, since the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the game where the player enters the variable entrance means Pay attention to the whereabouts of the sphere. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A5 of the present invention group,
The reversing entrance means is
A first receiving portion (each plate-like body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the reversing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower wing member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second incoming portion,
By receiving a game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from an open state to a closed state, and by receiving a game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from a closed state to an open state. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the reversing entrance means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entry means disposed in the first path,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lotteries (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the reverse entry means is arranged in the first path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is caused to enter the reverse entry means via the first route. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the predetermined number of internal lotteries. A game can be played in the hope of making it happen.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lotteries (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the reverse entry means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the reversing ball entry means does not cause the game ball to enter. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the feature group A of the present invention as described above, the player's choices can be expanded, and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board has been provided, and an internal lottery such as a big win lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operation port (starting ball entry means). A gaming machine to execute is known. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the gaming state shifts to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is interposed, the gaming machine enters the specific control state. There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the start ball entering means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the entry of the game ball into the start ball entering means as an opportunity, it is advantageous to the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to a specific control state,
An open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and from the open state to the closed state triggered by the entry of the game ball Reversing pitching means (non-electrically-powered object 51) to be transferred;
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means, the variable ball entry means (Kroon 53A) that allows the game balls flowing down the game area to enter temporarily. And a first croon 55),
The variable pitching means is
A ball entry portion (each hole 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for entering a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means;
Opening / closing lottery section (rotating body 537, tray 538, and second cloon) for lottery whether or not the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball entrance portion 56),
The gaming state transition means includes
A specific control start unit (game state transition process) for starting a game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the ball entry unit after the game state is shifted to the specific control state A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming balls enter the starting pitching means. Variable entry means that enables entry, and the variable entry means includes an entry part that starts a game in a specific control state when the game ball enters, so that the player can enter the game state transition means Then, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the game ball to enter the entrance portion. In addition, since the variable pitching means includes an open / close lottery section for lottery whether or not to shift the reverse pitching means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the pitching part. When the lottery executed by the open / close lottery unit is won and the reverse entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player changes the gaming state to the next specific control state by the gaming state transition means. After shifting to, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the reversal entry means to enter the game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A plurality of entrance parts including a first entrance part (holes 533B, 533C, 553B) and a second entrance part (holes 533A, 553A);
The game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entering part is the specific that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

  According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry portion, the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball , Expecting to enter the second entrance. In addition, when the lottery executed by the open / close lottery unit is won and the reversing ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state, the player specifies the next game state by the game state change means. After the transition to the control state, a game ball is made to enter the reversing entrance means, thereby giving the player a higher value than a game in a specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the first entrance part. A game in a specific control state to be given can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when entering the game balls into the ball entering part, the game balls entering the first ball entering part A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than a game in the specific control state that is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the second entrance part can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, The game ball entering the second ball entrance part is a game ball entering the first ball entrance part by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the player enters the game, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player may enter the second entrance part. Expect. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed entrance ball having an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball Means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control start unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means in the open state, until it is set in the closed state again is one game of the specific control state (round game),
The specific control start unit
By setting the opening / closing number of times of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing ball entry means is larger than the predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times, a game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

  According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit sets the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing entrance means to a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the first entrance unit. A game in a specific control state in which a ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing entrance means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number when entering the reversing entrance means and the second entry portion. Thus, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started, so that the player can start a game in the specific control state by going to the second pitching unit. Will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B4 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A croon having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means (clun 53A and first clown 55);
The plurality of ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface, and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

  According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, since the plurality of balls are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The rolling surface is
The ball is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface, and includes the plurality of balls that are provided at equal intervals.
The open / close lottery section
A rotating body (rotating body 537) that rotates with the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface as a central axis and that enters the game balls that have entered the plurality of entering portions,
The rotating body is
A plurality of rotating passages (rotating passages 537C1 to 537C3) that are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of entering portions, and that guide the game balls that have entered the plurality of entering portions,
The plurality of rotor passages are:
A first rotating body passage (rotating body passages 537C2, 537C3) that does not shift the reversing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state when a game ball enters;
A gaming machine comprising: a second rotating body passage (rotating body passage 537C1) that shifts the reversing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state when a game ball enters.

  According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the open / close lottery section includes a rotating body that rotates about the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface as a central axis and receives game balls that have entered the plurality of entering sections. The rotating body has a first rotating body passage that does not shift the reversing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, and the reversing ball entry means from the closed state when the game ball enters. A second rotor passage for shifting to an open state. According to this, the open / close lottery unit independently turns the reversing ball entry means from the closed state without being influenced by the croon having a plurality of ball entering portions that start the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters. Whether or not to shift to the open state can be drawn. Further, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the game balls that have entered the plurality of ball entering portions to enter the second rotating body passage of the rotating body, When the game state is transferred to the next specific control state by the game state shift means, the player enters the game ball into the first ball entry section by entering the game ball into the reverse ball entry means. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives a player a higher value than a game in a specific control state to be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The open / close lottery section
A lottery cruon (second cruon 56) having a lottery rolling surface (rolling surface 561) for rolling the game balls that have entered the first and second balls;
The lottery Kroon is
A plurality of lottery entrance portions (each hole 563A to 563C) for entering a game ball rolling on the lottery rolling surface, provided on the lottery rolling surface,
The plurality of lottery entrance parts are:
A first lottery entrance portion (each hole 563B, 563C) that does not allow the reversal entrance means to shift from the closed state to the open state when a game ball enters;
A gaming machine comprising: a second lottery entrance portion (hole 563A) for shifting the reversing entrance means from a closed state to an open state upon the entrance of a game ball.

  According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the open / close lottery section has a first lottery entrance section that does not shift the inversion entrance means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, There is provided a lottery cloon including a second lottery entrance portion that shifts the reversal entrance means from the closed state to the open state upon entering the ball. According to this, the open / close lottery section can be independently operated without being affected by the crurn provided with the first and second pitching sections that start the game in the specific control state when the game balls enter. It is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not the reversing entrance means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Further, by causing the game balls that have entered the first entrance part and the second entrance part to enter the second entrance part for lottery, the inversion entrance means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. In such a case, the player moves the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters the first ball entry section by causing the reverse ball entry means to enter the game ball. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives a player a higher value than a game in a specific control state that is started when the game ball enters. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features B1 to B7 of the present invention group,
The reversing entrance means is
A first receiving portion (each plate-like body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the reversing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower wing member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second incoming portion,
By receiving a game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from an open state to a closed state, and by receiving a game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from a closed state to an open state. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the reversing entrance means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B8 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entry means disposed in the first path,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lotteries (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the reverse entry means is arranged in the first path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is caused to enter the reverse entry means via the first route. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the predetermined number of internal lotteries. A game can be played in the hope of making it happen.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B8 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lottery (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the reverse entry means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the reversing ball entry means does not cause the game ball to enter. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the feature group B of the present invention as described above, the player's choices can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board has been provided, and an internal lottery such as a big win lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operation port (starting ball entry means). A gaming machine to execute is known. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the gaming state shifts to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is interposed, the gaming machine enters the specific control state. There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the start ball entering means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the entry of the game ball into the start ball entering means as an opportunity, it is advantageous to the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to a specific control state,
An open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and from the open state to the closed state triggered by the entry of the game ball Reversing pitching means (non-electrically-powered object 51) to be transferred;
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered, and the game ball can be entered. , The variable pitching means (Kroon 53C) for shifting the reversal pitching means from the closed state to the open state, triggered by
The gaming state transition means includes
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state, a specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the variable ball entry means ).

  According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming balls enter the starting pitching means. Variable entry means that enables entry, and the variable entry means starts a game in a specific control state when the game ball enters, so that the player can control the game state in a specific control state with the game state transition means After shifting to, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball. Further, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, the player changes the game state to the next time using the game state transfer means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the reversal ball entry means to enter the game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A first ball entry portion (each hole 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry portion (hole 533A) for entering the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means;
The game state transition means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit,
The game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entering part is the specific that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

  According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry portion, the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball , Expecting to enter the second entrance. Further, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, the player changes the game state to the next time using the game state transfer means. After the transition to the specific control state, the player has a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the first ball entry section by causing the reversal ball entry means to enter the game ball. A game in a specific control state to be given to can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when entering the game balls into the ball entering part, the game balls entering the first ball entering part A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than a game in the specific control state that is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the entering of the game ball into the second entrance part can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be dispensed, The game ball entering the second ball entrance part is a game ball entering the first ball entrance part by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the player enters the game, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player may enter the second entrance part. Expect. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed entrance ball having an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball Means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control start unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means in the open state, until it is set in the closed state again is one game of the specific control state (round game),
The specific control start unit
By setting the opening / closing number of times of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing ball entry means is larger than the predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times, a game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

  According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit sets the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing entrance means to a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the first entrance unit. A game in a specific control state in which a ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing entrance means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number when entering the reversing entrance means and the second entry portion. Thus, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started, so that the player can start a game in the specific control state by going to the second pitching unit. Will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of features C2 to C4 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A crune (clun 53C) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means;
The first and second ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface, and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

  According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, since the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player has entered the variable entrance means. Pay attention to the whereabouts of the sphere. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C5 of the present invention group,
The reversing entrance means is
A first receiving portion (each plate-like body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the reversing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower wing member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second incoming portion,
By receiving a game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from an open state to a closed state, and by receiving a game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from a closed state to an open state. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entry means disposed in the first path,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lotteries (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing the second starting entrance portion to enter the game ball via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the reverse entry means is arranged in the first path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is caused to enter the reverse entry means via the first route. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the predetermined number of internal lotteries. A game can be played in the hope of making it happen.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lotteries (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the reverse entry means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the reversing ball entry means does not cause the game ball to enter. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the feature group C of the present invention, the player's options can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board has been provided, and an internal lottery such as a big win lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operation port (starting ball entry means). A gaming machine to execute is known. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the gaming state shifts to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is interposed, the gaming machine enters the specific control state. There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the start ball entering means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the entry of the game ball into the start ball entering means as an opportunity, it is advantageous to the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to a specific control state,
An open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and from the open state to the closed state triggered by the entry of the game ball Reversing pitching means (non-electrically-operated accessory 57) to be transferred;
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered, and the game ball can be entered. And the variable pitching means (Kroon 53D) for shifting the reversing pitching means from the closed state to the open state, triggered by
The starting pitching means is
A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part, and that makes it difficult to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The reversing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means includes
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state, a specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the variable ball entry means ).

  According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming balls enter the starting pitching means. Variable entry means that enables entry, and the variable entry means starts a game in a specific control state when the game ball enters, so that the player can control the game state in a specific control state with the game state transition means After shifting to, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball. Further, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, the player changes the game state to the next time using the game state transfer means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by causing the reversal ball entry means to enter the game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the reversing entrance means is disposed in the third path, the player can invert the reversal by causing the starting ball entering means to launch the game ball in a different path from that in which the game ball is entered. A game ball can enter the ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the player's intention, and can make the player play the game comfortably.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is lower than the first starting entrance portion;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting entrance portion is higher than the first starting entrance portion;
A gaming state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state;
The gaming state switching unit switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries, and then performs the second gaming state. The gaming machine is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player performs a predetermined number of internal lottery (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by causing a game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route. After that, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting entrance part via the second route, so the player enters the game ball to the first start entrance part via the first route. Thus, an internal lottery can be executed. In addition, since the reverse entry means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the reverse entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes a predetermined number of internal lotteries. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the reversing ball entry means does not cause the game ball to enter. Therefore, the reverse entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or feature D2 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A first ball entry portion (each hole 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry portion (hole 533A) for entering the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means;
The specific control start unit starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entering unit and the second ball entering unit,
The game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entering part is the specific that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

  According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entering portion is the game ball entering the first ball entering portion. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball , Expecting to enter the second entrance. Further, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, the player changes the game state to the next time using the game state transfer means. After the transition to the specific control state, the player has a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the first ball entry section by causing the reversal ball entry means to enter the game ball. A game in a specific control state to be given to can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when entering the game balls into the ball entering part, the game balls entering the first ball entering part A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than a game in the specific control state that is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the entering of the game ball into the second entrance part can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be dispensed, The game ball entering the second ball entrance part is a game ball entering the first ball entrance part by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started when the player enters the game, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player may enter the second entrance part. Expect. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D4 of the present invention group,
An open / closed entrance ball having an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball Means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control start unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means in the open state, until it is set in the closed state again is one game of the specific control state (round game),
The specific control start unit
By setting the opening / closing number of times of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing ball entry means is larger than the predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times, a game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

  According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit sets a predetermined number of games by setting the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing means when the game ball enters the first ball entering unit. A game in a specific control state in which a ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing entrance means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number when entering the reversing entrance means and the second entry portion. Thus, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started, so that the player can start a game in the specific control state by going to the second pitching unit. Will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features D3 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable pitching means is
A crune (clun 53D) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means;
The first and second ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface, and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

  According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, since the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player has entered the variable entrance means. Pay attention to the whereabouts of the sphere. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
The reversing entrance means is
A first receiving portion (each blade member 571) for receiving a game ball that has entered the reversing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (second arm portion 576C) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second entering portion;
By receiving a game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from an open state to a closed state, and by receiving a game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from a closed state to an open state. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. Therefore, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

  According to such a feature group D of the present invention, the player's choices can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board has been provided, and an internal lottery such as a big win lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operation port (starting ball entry means). A gaming machine to execute is known. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the gaming state shifts to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is interposed, the gaming machine enters the specific control state. There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

  As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating opening, 37 ... Lower operating opening, 38 ... Variable winning apparatus, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening / closing door, 38c ... Variable winning driving section, 39 ... Out Mouth, 51 ... Symbol display device, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... Sound emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... MPU.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. A game state in which the game state is shifted to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the start ball entering means for executing the game and the game ball entering the start ball entering means as a trigger A game machine having a transition means, wherein the game machine has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the inversion ball entry means that transitions from the open state to the closed state as an opportunity and the game ball entry into the start entry means, the game balls that flow down the game area Variable entry that allows entry temporarily The variable entry means includes a game ball that has entered the variable entry means, and the reverse entry means is not shifted from the closed state to the open state when triggered by the entry of the game ball. A second entry that causes a game ball that has entered the first entry part and the variable entry means to enter, and that the inversion entry means shifts from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. And the gaming state transition means transfers the gaming state to the specific control state, and then the gaming ball is transferred to any one of the reversing pitching means, the first pitching section, and the second pitching section. A specific control start unit for starting a game in a specific control state at the time of entering a ball is provided.

Claims (5)

Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a start ball that causes the game ball flowing down the game area to enter and executes an internal lottery when the game ball enters And a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine,
An open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and from the open state to the closed state triggered by the entry of the game ball Reversing pitching means to move,
Variable entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter temporarily based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the start entry means. ,
The variable pitching means is
A first entrance portion that enters a game ball that has entered the variable entrance means, and that does not allow the inversion entrance means to transition from a closed state to an open state when triggered by the entrance of the game ball;
A second ball entry unit that causes the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter, and that causes the reverse ball entry means to transition from the closed state to the open state when triggered by the game ball,
The gaming state transition means includes
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state, the specific control state is set when the game ball enters any one of the reversing ball entry means, the first ball entry portion, and the second ball entry portion. A gaming machine comprising a specific control starting unit for starting the game. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entering part is the specific that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state. In the gaming machine according to claim 2,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when entering the game balls into the ball entering part, the game balls entering the first ball entering part A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than a game in the specific control state that is started upon entering a ball. In the gaming machine according to claim 3,
An open / closed entrance ball having an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball With means,
The specific control start unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means in the open state, until it is set in the closed state again as one game of the specific control state,
The specific control start unit
By setting the opening / closing number of times of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing ball entry means is larger than the predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times, a game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The variable pitching means is
A croon having a rolling surface for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means,
The first and second ball entering portions are provided on the rolling surface, and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

Images